Jan-701 901M

JAN-701/901M
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Not use the asbestos +05647%6+10/#07#.

/CTKPG5GTXKEG&GRCTVOGPV
6GNGRJQPG
(CEUKOKNG
GOCKN VOUE"OLTEEQLR
#/56'4&#/$TCPEJ
6GNGRJQPG
(CEUKOKNG
GOCKN LTE"LTETPN
5'#66.'$TCPEJ
6GNGRJQPG
(CEUKOKNG
GOCKN UGTXKEG"LTECOGTKECEQO
%1&'0Q<20## +51+51%GTVKHKGF
/#4'FKVKQP,4%
Cautions for High Voltage
High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in
electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally harm-
less in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very dangerous.
(Any person other than authorized service engineers should not service, inspect, or adjust the
unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant deaths
from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts could
lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand into the
inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is strongly
suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge with a wire
having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you put your hand
into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer charged. Extra protec-
tion is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another important precaution to
observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of using both hands at the same
time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of electri-
cal shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the burnt
site completely and obtain medical care immediately.
Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit
immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible
without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating
material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric
shock. If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A
victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop, result-
ing in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid immediately.
Method of First-Aid Treatment
Precautions for First-Aid Treatments

Whenever a person is struck by an electrical shock, give the patient artificial respiration
immediately on the spot, unless it is absolutely necessary to move the patient for safety's
sake. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider
could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.
(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable
gently.
(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.
(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.
(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.

(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.
(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if
any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like
into the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the
patient clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or
the like to force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)
(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating.
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a
Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1
(1) Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may
be placed under the neck.)
(2) Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (to spread the airway)
(3) Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the
patient's mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your
mouth away and take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat
blowing at 10 to 15 times a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).
(4) Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.
(5) If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of
rubber or vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the
nostril through the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
(6) The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the
patient lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not
alcoholic drink) to keep him or her warm.
Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted
q (1) Lift the back part of the patient's head.

Support the forehead with one of
your hand and the neck with the
other hand. q.
Many patients will have their air-
ways opened by lifting their head
in this way to ease mouth-to-
mouth artificial respiration.
w (2) Closing the patient's mouth with
your mouth, press your cheek
against the patient's nose w.
Alternatively, hold the patient's
nose with your finger to prevent
air leak e.
e (3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.

Blow air into the patient's lungs
until chest is seen to rise. The
first 10 breaths must be blown as
fast as possible.
Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No
Pulse Beating and Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing cardiac massage - Fig. 2
If the patient has no pulse beating, with the pupils open and no heartbeat being
heard, the patient has a cardiac arrest and requires immediate artificial respiration.
Continue this until a medical specialist arrives, and follow his or her directions after
that.
(1) Putting one hand on about the lower one third of the patient's ribs and the other
hand over the back of the first, with your elbow fully stretched (with bended
elbow, you cant press to the extent the patients ribs are depressed), apply
your body weight to the hands to press the patient's body until it is depressed
about 2 cm (Repeat this about 50 times a minute). (Cardiac massage.)
(2) If only one first-aider is available, perform a cardiac massage about 15 times
and then give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence.
If two first-aiders are available, while one person performs a cardiac massage
15 times, and the other should give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times.
Repeat this sequence (combined cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth artifi-
cial respiration method).
(3) Check the patient's pupils and feel the pulse from time to time. When the pupils
are restored to normal and the pulse begins to beat regularly, stop treating and
keep the patient calm while giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink
to keep him or her warm while watching him or her carefully.
q w
e r
Fig.2 Cardiac massage

PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701/901M ECDIS.
This equipment is ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System) meets the
performance standards of the IMO (International Maritime Organization) and the IHO
(International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to improve safety, reduce fuel combustion,
reduce voyage time and automate voyages.
For the best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly before use.
Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
This LCD uses 1,310,000 (JAN-701)/1,920,000 (JAN-901M) or more TFTs (Thin Film
Transistor).
If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is brighter than
usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent characteristic of the TFT
display technology.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.
i
Before Operation
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on
these equipment so that you can operate them safely and correctly and
prevent any danger to you and / or to other persons and any damage to your
property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as
follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in danger

of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is neglected and
these equipment are not operated correctly.
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or

any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is neglected
and these equipment are not operated correctly.
Examples of pictorial indication

The mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).
Detailed contents of CAUTION (Electric Shock in the example on the
Electric left.) is shown in the mark.
shock
The mark represents prohibition.

Detailed contents of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in
Disassembling the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
prohibited
The mark represents instruction.

Detailed contents of the instruction (Disconnect the power plug in the
Disconnect example on the left) is shown in the mark.
the power plug
Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
ii
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation
Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.
Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur.
Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on this
equipment.
If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electrical shock, or a malfunction may
occur.
In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power
immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact our
head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire, an electric
shock or a malfunction.
In case you find smoke, strange smell or unusual heat coming from the equipment,
turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet,
and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
Do not use the offset function during navigation.

If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position, the
position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the real one, and accidents
may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position panel on
the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position Shift is displayed
in the message display area. Check these indications, and cancel the offset function
if necessary.
iii
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and crossing
safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WP during automatic sailing, be sure
to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the [TURN] key while keeping
the [GUARD] key pressed).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may result.
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.

Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on their
and terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your skin, wash it
off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes. If you find any skin
problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the liquid gets in your eye,
wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes, and then,
consult a doctor as soon as possible.
iv
Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight or in the temperatures above
55C for a long time.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.
Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.

Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction.
This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

If no backup measures are taken, such as using another EDIS unit for confirmation,
be sure to use official marine charts together with this equipment to make any
navigational decision.
This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information automatically
for navigation.
The positional information should always be checked by the user against such
information from other sources.
Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.
Do not place any object on the operation panel.

Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the floppy
disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
v
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).
Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as necessary,
regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not.
Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the power
before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off the
power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office
to request servicing.
To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such as
thinner or benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.
Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface of the
equipment.
vi
Equipment Appearance
Stand-alone type (JAN-701)
vii
Stand-alone type (JAN-901M)
viii
Flash-mount type
ix
Glossary
AIS : Automatic Identification System
ANTS : Automatic Navigation & Track-keeping System
ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.
ARPA : Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.
AUTHORIZATION CODE : Encryption key for C-MAP Ed.2. Supplied by C-MAP Norway.
AUTO SAIL : The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as auto-
matic sailing.
Base CD : Chart CD containing a complete chart data.
Cell Permit : A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO, PRIMAR
STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast
Guard.
Chart Portfolio : Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.
C-MAP Ed.2 : C-MAP Edition 2. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP Ed.3 : C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP : Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.
CO. TO STEER : Course to steer. Heading command.
COG : Course Over Ground
Data Server : Organization providing S-63 chart.
Display : Screen displayed on the LCD.
DIST. : Distance
DR : Dead Reckoning
EBL : Electronic Bearing Lines
ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System
ENC : Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.
ETA : Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD : Estimated Time of Departure
x
F.ETA : Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.
GC : Great Circle
HDG : Ships heading
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department

: Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard. Publisher
of ENC.
Import (for Chart Portfolio) : A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on ECDIS.
Leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints
LMT : Local Mean Time
LON : Longitude
Primary : Main positioning sensor.
PRIMAR STAVANGER : A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.
Range : An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half of the
length of the chart display screen.
RL : Rhumb Line
Rubber band : Border that indicates the selected range.
S-57 : IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.
S-63 : IHO Data Protection Scheme
SA Certificate file : An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/up-
date of S-63 chart.
Scale : The display scale.
SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart
Ship-avoiding operation : To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation, re-
gardless of the scheduled route.
SOG : Speed Over Ground
Spot depth : Numeric representation of depth.
UKHO : United Kingdom Hydrographic Office
Update (for Chart Portfolio) : A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the im-
ported chart.
xi
Update CD : Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. Base CD data has
been imported.
USER CODE : A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63 charts.
UTC : Coordinated Universal Time
VRM : Variable Range Markers
WOL : Wheel Over Line
WOP : Wheel Over Point
WP : Waypoint
WP-WP : The division of the leg specified by two waypoints. Displays data between two
consecutive waypoints.
XTD : Cross Track Distance
XTL : Cross Track Limit
xii
Contents
PREFACE ...................................................................................................................................................... i
Before Operation .................................................................................................................................. ii
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation .......................................................................................... iii
Equipment Appearance ............................................................................................................................... vii
Glossary ......................................................................................................................................................... x
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Function ........................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.3 Components ..................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Construction .................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-13
Chapter 2 Names and Functions
2.1 Function of Operation Panel ........................................................................................................... 2-2
and LCD brilliance control .............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Function of the Screen ..................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1 Display Panel ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar .................................................................................................................... 2-12
Chapter 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS
3.1 Menu Operation ............................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu ...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball ..................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu ....................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.1.3 How to Use the Shortcut Menu ............................................................................ 3-7
3.1.2 Various Panels ..................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters .................................................................................... 3-10
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard .................................................................................... 3-10
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard ............................................................................. 3-11
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input .................................................................................................... 3-12
3.1.3.4 Character Input ..................................................................................................... 3-13
3.2 General Flowchart ........................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.2.1 General Flowchart ............................................................................................................... 3-14
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing .......................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation ..................................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER]) ....................................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu ................................................................................................. 3-18
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only) ........................................................... 3-19
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation ......................................................................................................... 3-21
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume ..................................................................... 3-21
3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT]) ................................................................... 3-24
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]) .................................................................... 3-25
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR]) ........................................................................... 3-29
3.3.9 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([AIS/ARPA]) ....................................... 3-31
3.3.10 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations ........................................................ 3-37
3.3.11 Using the CD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive ....................................................................... 3-38
3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP ......................................................................................................... 3-39
3.4.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel .................................................... 3-39
3.4.2 Selecting ROUTE and To WP from the Menu ................................................................... 3-40
3.4.3 Calculating Distance to Run ............................................................................................... 3-42
3.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...................................................................... 3-45
3.6 Shifting the Chart ............................................................................................................................ 3-47
3.6.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button ....................................................................... 3-47
3.6.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor ........................................................................... 3-48
3.6.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor ............................................................................ 3-49
3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button .............................................................. 3-49
3.6.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position ................................................................... 3-50
3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................................................................. 3-51
3.7.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................................ 3-51
3.7.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) ................................................................................ 3-52
3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ......................................................................... 3-53
3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......................................................................... 3-54
3.8 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only) .................................................................................. 3-55
3.8.1 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only) .................................................................. 3-55
3.8.2 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only) ................................................................... 3-55
3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) ...................................................................... 3-56
3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only) .............................................................................. 3-57
3.8.5 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only) ............................................................................... 3-58
3.8.6 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ................................................................ 3-59
3.8.7 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ........................................................... 3-59
3.8.8 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only) ............................................................... 3-60
3.8.9 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only) .......................................... 3-61
3.8.10 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only) .......................................................................................... 3-62
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only) ................................................................................................ 3-66
3.10 Displaying a User Chart .................................................................................................................. 3-67
3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart ................................................................................................ 3-68
3.12 User-Marking/Highlighting ............................................................................................................. 3-69
3.12.1 Marking the Event Mark (EVENT) .................................................................................... 3-69
3.12.2 Marking the Information Mark ........................................................................................... 3-71
3.12.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark ......................................................................................... 3-72
3.12.4 Highlighting ........................................................................................................................ 3-73
3.12.5 Inputting Clearing Lines ..................................................................................................... 3-74
3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects ........................................................................................ 3-75
3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways .................................................................................................. 3-78
(Multi View/Wide View) .................................................................................................................. 3-78
3.14.1 Multi View Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-78
3.14.2 Selecting an Area ................................................................................................................ 3-79
3.14.3 Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................................................................. 3-80
3.15 Using the Analog Meter .................................................................................................................. 3-81
3.16 Own Ships Setting ([Ship] - [Option]) ........................................................................................... 3-82
3.16.1 Ships Shape ........................................................................................................................ 3-83
3.16.2 Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary Position ...................................................... 3-84
3.16.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector ................................................................................... 3-85
3.16.4 Track and Time Label Display ............................................................................................ 3-86
3.16.5 Beam Bearing Line ............................................................................................................. 3-87
3.17 Operating EBL/VRM ...................................................................................................................... 3-88
3.17.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel .............................................................. 3-88
3.17.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Menu ............................................................................... 3-92
3.17.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option ............................................................................. 3-92
3.17.2.2 1-step Operation ................................................................................................... 3-92
3.17.2.3 2-step Operation ................................................................................................... 3-97
3.18 Running Fix ..................................................................................................................................... 3-101
3.19 Maneuver Curve .............................................................................................................................. 3-102
3.20 Cross Bearing .................................................................................................................................. 3-104
3.21 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode .................................................................................................... 3-106
3.21.1 Selecting Motion Mode ...................................................................................................... 3-108
3.21.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only) .................................................................. 3-109
3.21.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode ....................................................................................................... 3-109
3.22 My Port List ..................................................................................................................................... 3-111
3.22.1 Adding to My Port List ....................................................................................................... 3-111
3.22.2 Deleting My Port List ......................................................................................................... 3-112
3.23 Logbook ........................................................................................................................................... 3-113
3.23.1 Displaying the Logbook ...................................................................................................... 3-113
3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options .................................................................................................... 3-116
3.24 Setting the Chart Options ................................................................................................................ 3-118
3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options ................................................................................. 3-118
3.24.2 Setting Other Chart Options ............................................................................................... 3-133
3.24.3 Setting Scales ...................................................................................................................... 3-134
3.25 Setting the Alarm Options ............................................................................................................... 3-135
3.26 Monitoring Dragging Anchor .......................................................................................................... 3-137
3.27 Setting the View Options ([View]) .................................................................................................. 3-139
3.27.1 Setting Radar Options ......................................................................................................... 3-139
3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options ................................................................................................. 3-140
3.27.3 Setting Analog Meter Options ............................................................................................ 3-144
3.27.4 Setting Logbook Options .................................................................................................... 3-144
3.27.5 Clear Voyage Distance ........................................................................................................ 3-144
3.27.6 Setting Date/Time ............................................................................................................... 3-145
3.28 Shifting Own Ship Position ............................................................................................................. 3-146
3.28.1 Shifting Using the Cursor ................................................................................................... 3-148
3.28.2 Shifting by Entering the Position ........................................................................................ 3-148
3.28.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value ................................................................................. 3-149
3.29 Canceling the Ship Offset ................................................................................................................ 3-149
3.30 Printing Display (Only when Connected to a Printer) .................................................................... 3-149
3.31 Saving the Screen (Only when Connected to Backup Device) ...................................................... 3-150
3.32 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the Navigation & Planning) .................................................... 3-150
Chapter 4 Route Planning
4.1 Route Planning ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options ................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor .............................................................................. 4-7
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor) .................................. 4-8
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor .................................................................. 4-12
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor) ............................................................ 4-14
4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor) ....................................................... 4-24
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files .......................................................................................... 4-25
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files .......................................................................................... 4-26
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor .......................................................................... 4-27
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode .......................................................................................... 4-27
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor) .......................... 4-28
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing) ................................ 4-33
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing) ....................................................... 4-35
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor) .................................................. 4-49
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files .......................................................................................... 4-50
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files .......................................................................................... 4-51
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials ............................................ 4-52
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route ............................................................................................................ 4-55
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart ........................................................................................................... 4-55
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route .................................................................................................... 4-56
Chapter 5 Chart Editing
5.1 Chart Edit Mode .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 Menus and Button Functions ........................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu ............................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.2 Button Functions ................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.3 Operation Flowchart ........................................................................................................................ 5-9
5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit ...................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Charts .................................................................................. 5-11
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Chart .................................................................................. 5-11
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Chart ............................................................................................. 5-14
5.3.2.3 Merging User Charts ............................................................................................ 5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Charts .......................................................................................... 5-17
5.4 Manual Update Operation ............................................................................................................... 5-18
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update ...................................................................................................... 5-18
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects ..................................................................... 5-19
5.5 Entering Objects .............................................................................................................................. 5-22
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types ........................................................................................................ 5-24
5.5.2 Entering Objects .................................................................................................................. 5-25
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation) ............................................ 5-38
Chapter 6 Automatic Sailing
6.1 Automatic Sailing System ............................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning) ............................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Route Monitoring and System Alarm ................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing .......................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation ........................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WP ......................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing ....................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.3 Terminating the Automatic Sailing ..................................................................................... 6-8
Chapter 7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu
7.1 File Manager .................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Chart Abbreviations ......................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3 Setting the User Key ........................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.4 Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Sensor .............................................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position .......................................................................... 7-8
7.5.2 Bearing Setting .................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.3 Speed Setting ....................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.4 Depth Setting ....................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.5 Date Data Source Setting .................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.6 Time Zone Data Source Setting .......................................................................................... 7-10
7.6 Color Test (ARCS Only) ................................................................................................................. 7-11
Chapter 8 Chart Portfolio
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio ............................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Chart Portfolio Screen ..................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3 Overview Flow Chart ...................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.1 Overview Flow Chart .......................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.2 Import/Update of S-57 Chart .............................................................................................. 8-25
8.3.2.1 Import of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio .............................................................. 8-25
8.3.2.2 Update of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio .............................................................. 8-29
8.3.3 Import/Update of S-63 Chart .............................................................................................. 8-33
8.3.3.1 Import of SA Certificate file ................................................................................ 8-33
8.3.3.2 Selection of SA Certificate file ............................................................................ 8-36
8.3.3.3 Import of Cell Permit ........................................................................................... 8-37
8.3.3.4 Import of S-63 Chart ............................................................................................ 8-40
8.3.3.5 Update of S-63 Chart ........................................................................................... 8-43
8.3.4 Import/Update of ARCS Chart ........................................................................................... 8-47
8.3.4.1 Checkup of ARCS ................................................................................................ 8-47
8.3.4.2 Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio ...................................................................... 8-48
8.3.4.3 Update of ARCS in Chart Portfolio ..................................................................... 8-55
8.3.5 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart ................................................................................ 8-58
8.3.5.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.2 ..................................................................................... 8-58
8.3.5.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio ................................................. 8-60
8.3.5.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio ................................................ 8-65
8.3.6 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.3 .......................................................................................... 8-67
8.3.6.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.3 ..................................................................................... 8-67
8.3.6.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio ................................................. 8-68
8.3.6.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio ................................................ 8-80
8.3.6.4 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart with E-mail .......................................................... 8-82
8.4 Editing Operations (For C-MAP Ed.2) ........................................................................................... 8-92
8.4.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection (Selectable Filter) ..................................................... 8-92
8.4.2 Selecting all Source Charts (Select All) ............................................................................. 8-92
8.4.3 Deleting the System Chart (Delete) .................................................................................... 8-92
8.5 Filtering the Source Charts (For C-MAP Ed.2) .............................................................................. 8-93
8.6 View Operations .............................................................................................................................. 8-94
8.6.1 Getting Chart Information ([Information]) ......................................................................... 8-94
8.6.2 Viewing the Cell Permit Information (For S-63) ................................................................ 8-95
8.6.3 Viewing the ARCS License Information (For ARCS) ....................................................... 8-95
8.6.4 Viewing the Version Information of the Chart Portfolio .................................................... 8-95
8.7 Setting the Chart Portfolio............................................................................................................... 8-96
8.7.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update .......................................................................................... 8-96
8.7.2 Setting the S-63 Options ..................................................................................................... 8-97
8.7.3 Setting the C-MAP Options ................................................................................................ 8-98
8.7.4 Setting the ARCS Options .................................................................................................. 8-99
8.7.5 Setting the Boot Options ..................................................................................................... 8-99
8.7.6 Setting the Advanced Options ............................................................................................. 8-100
Chapter 9 Playback
9.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback ......................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Playing Back the Logging Data ...................................................................................................... 9-8
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection
10.1 Confirming Alarm ........................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57) ............................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale ........................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3 Replacing Consumables .................................................................................................................. 10-7
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input ............................................................................. 10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu ................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.5.1 Backup Option .................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.5.2 Hardware Key Information ................................................................................................. 10-10
10.6 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 10-11
Chapter 11 After-Sales Service
11.1 Maintenance Service ....................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts ..................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3 When Asking for Service ................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.4 Checks and Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 11-2
Chapter 12 Disposal
12.1 Disposal of the Product ................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Disposal of Used Batteries .............................................................................................................. 12-2
12.3 Disposal of LCD Module ................................................................................................................ 12-2
Chapter 13 Specifications
13.1 Bridge Display Terminal ................................................................................................................. 13-2
Chapter 14 Reference
14.1 Alarm Fuction .................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information ................................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart ..................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart .......................................................................... 14-7
14.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart .............................................................................. 14-8
14.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System .................................................................................................. 14-12
14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export .................................................................... 14-13
Index
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR JAN-701/901M SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
Repair Request Form
1
Overview
1-1
1.1 Function
This equipment is navigation system with ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System) functions con-
forming to the ECDIS Performance Standards adopted in Resolution A.817 at the general assembly of the IMO.
Consequently, this equipment can become the core of an integrated navigation system (INS) or integrated bridge
system (IBS) that supports one-man bridge operation.
Safe sailing
Energy-saved sailing
ECDIS
Compliance with the ECDIS defined by the IHO/IMO
Availability of S-57edition 3.0/3.1 (supporting S-63) format, C-MAP Ed.2/Ed.3, and ARCS as chart data-
bases
Own ships track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart
Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for ARCS)
ARPA target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart
Superimpose display of radar echo on the electronic chart (when ECDIS is used with the optional radar
overlay kit)
True/Relative motion display
North-up/Course-up display
Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/distances up to waypoints,
and planned arrival time
Availability of two EBLs/VRMs
Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart
Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ships speed
Display specifications
Size: 18.1-inch color LCD (JAN-701)
23.1-inch color LCD (JAN-901M)
Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn, and dusk
Display of the symbols and colors recommended by the IHO
Navigation Planning
Editing of route information
Addition, deletion, and modification of waypoints on the electronic chart
Calculation of the distance between waypoints, bearings, and planned arrival time
Up to 512 waypoints per route
Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes
Automatic sailing functions

Route tracking
Course change
Alarm functions
Safety depth crossing alarm
Dangerous areas crossing alarm
Waypoint arrival alarm
XTD alarm
Logging functions
Logging of navigation information onto the hard disk
Own ships playback using logged data
1 Overview 1-2
1.2 Features 1
This ECDIS has the following features:
Displays vector charts such as S-57 and C-MAP, and raster charts such as ARCS
Safe navigation ensured by the crossing alarm function for safety contours and dangerous areas and the
guard ring function (not available for ARCS)
Optimized displays of navigation warnings, weather warnings, and emergency messages from the con-
nected Navtex receiver
Ease of operation supported by high-speed drawing and high-speed processing
Ease of user chart creation
Multi view function to display two charts at a time (not available for C-MAP Ed.3 and ARCS)
Wide range view in addition to single or multi view
Route planning in two ways, using table editor or graphic editor
Creation of alternative route during voyage
Automatic sailing by connecting with autopilot
Playback function to check the voyage
S-57 update portfolio
1-3 1 Overview
1.3 Components
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below.
Components
Name Model Quantity Comment

Bridge Display Terminal
(JAN-701) NCD-4224 1 Main Unit
(JAN-901M) NCD-4308
(JAN-701) NWZ-147-AC
Display Panel 1 Included in the main unit
(JAN-901M) NWZ-158
Operation panel (type A) NCE-7721-A Either type A or B is included in the main unit.
Type A has an automatic sailing function.
Type B does not have an automatic sailing
Operation panel (type B) NCE-7721-B function.
Processing unit NDC-1264 1 Included in the main unit

Instruction Manual (Japanese) 7ZPNA0512 1
Instruction Manual (English) 7ZPNA0513 1
Analog Interface Kit MPXP32636 1 Option NOTE 1)
Serial Interface Kit MPXP32637 1 Option NOTE 2)
Radar overlay kit MPXP32691 1 Option
Optional keyboard NCE-5009 1
(JAN-701) MPXP33088
Canvas cover 1 Option
(JAN-901M) MPXP33089
(JAN-701) MPOL30350
Lightproof hood 1 Option
(JAN-901M) MPOL30345
Spare Parts (CMJ-462 NSK I/F) 7ZZNA0400 1 12pcs, 0.5A
CD Cleaner
Accessary 7ZZNA0426 1 Packing in 1box
FD Cleaner
Note 1) The analog interface kit (MPXP32636) includes the serial interface kit (MPXP32637). See the packing
list included with the kit.
Note 2) If only the serial interface kit is needed and the analog interface is not necessary, then please request
MPXP32637. See the packing list included with the kit.
1 Overview 1-4
1-5
Analog I/F Kit
MPXP32636
1 Overview
1
1 Overview
1-6
Serial I/F Kit
MPXP32637
1.4 Construction 1
The outline drawing of the unit is shown below.
Cable Inlet
Mass: Approx. 125 kg
NCD-4224 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-701)
1-7 1 Overview
Mass: Approx. 150kg Cable Inlet
NCD-4308 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-901M)
1 Overview 1-8
1-9
MASS:APPROX. 85kg
Flash-mount type
NDC-1264 Processing Unit
1 Overview
1
MASS:APPROX. 10kg
1 Overview
1-10
Flash-mount type
NWZ-147-AC 18.1 LCD Unit
MASS:APPROX. 25kg
1-11
Flash-mount type
NWZ-158 Display Panel
1 Overview
1
MASS:APPROX. 3.1kg NCE7721-A Operation Panel (Type A)
MASS:APPROX. 3.1kg NCE7721-B Operation Panel (Type B)
1 Overview 1-12
1.5 System Configuration 1
The following diagram shows an example system configuration connected with this equipment.
When ECDIS mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the sensor.
When Conning Display mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the external ECDIS connected with
the equipment.
AIS
Gyro Compass
DGPS
LOG
Radar NAVTEX
RADAR DISPLAY
ECDIS
ECDIS
Auto Pilot
1-13 1 Overview
2
Names
and
Functions
2-1
This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.
2.1 Function of Operation Panel

and LCD brilliance control
(1) Function of operation panel
Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 show the operation panel. Table 2.1 describes the name and function of each part on the
operation panel.
q @8 @9
e
w
r t y u i @5
o !0
@3 @4 @6 @7
!1 !4 !5 !6
!2 !7 !8 !9
!3 @0 @1 @2
Fig. 2.1 Operation Panel (Type A)
q
e
w
r t y u i @5
o !0
@3 @4 @6 @7
!1 !4 !5 !6
!2 !7 !8 !9
!3 @0 @1 @2
Fig. 2.2 Operation Panel (Type B)
2 Names and Functions 2-2

Table 2.1 Names and Functions
No. Name Function

1 POWER Turns the power on.
2 PWR FAIL Indicates the AC power supply error.
(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.) 2
3 PWR ACK Stops the alarm at occurrence of PWR FAIL.
(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)
4 VIDEO*1 Adjusts the brightness of radar echoes.
5 RAIN*1 Suppresses rain/snow clutter.
6 SEA*1 Suppresses sea clutter.
7 GAIN*1 Adjusts receiver gain.
8 RANGE + Range up.
- Range down.
9 RADAR*1 Turns ON/OFF the radar echo display on the chart.
10 ALARM ACK Press to acknowledge an alarm.
11 ROUTE PLAN Starts/ends route the route planning function (table editor).
12 DAY / NIGHT Changes the display color of the screen to suit the lighting conditions of the bridge.
13 PANEL Dims the operation panel in five steps.
14 TGT DATA Displays the detailed information of a selected ARPA or AIS target.
15 AIS ACT Activate a selected AIS target.
16 AIS IN-ACT Deactivate a selected AIS target.
17 AIS/ARPA Selects AIS/ARPA display.
18 INFO Reads out the attributes of each object on the chart.
19 HOME Returns the own ships position into the display.
20 USER One of the following user-registered functions is executed:
(See 7.3 Setting the User Key.)
- Starting the route graphic editor
- Starting the chart editor
- Displaying the chart option setting screen
- Displaying the own ships option setting screen
- Adding to the port name list
- Changing the ARCSs active panel
- Loading ARCSs low resolution
- Displaying the logbook
- Printing the screen contents
21 OPTION1*2 Makes copies of the screen contents and save them into the external equipment.
22 OPTION2*2 Starts the software keyboard.
23 EBL1 / EBL2 Turns the Electronic Bearing Line ON/OFF, and operates the Electronic
Bearing Line.
24 VRM1 / VRM2 Turns the Variable Range Marker ON/OFF, and operates the Variable Range
Marker.
25 TRACKBALL The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen for position designa-
tion, selection of buttons on the display panel, menu designation, etc.
26 LEFT BUTTON Used for selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.
Pressing the left button is written as left-click in this book.
27 RIGHT BUTTON Used for confirming alarms.
Pressing the right button is written as right-click in this book.
2-3 2 Names and Functions

Table 2.1 Names and Functions (Continued)
No. Name Function

28*3 AUTO GUARD Used in combination with the [AUTO] or [TURN] switches.
SAILING AUTO*4 Starts or stops automatic sailing.
Use this switch in combination with the [GUARD] switch.
TURN*4 Starts turning.
Use this switch in combination with the [GUARD] switch.
SET CO. This switch is also used to create maneuver curves.
29*3 JOYSTICK Use this switch to create maneuver curves.
*1: Effective only when an optional radar overlay kit is installed.

*2: May not be effective depending on the system configuration used.
*3: Effective only when type A operation panel is used.
*4: Effective only when the equipment is linked to auto pilot.
(2) LCD brilliance control

The screens brightness can be adjusted by using the brilliance control on the display panel.
By keeping the brilliance control pressed, the screen s brightness will be adjusted to an optimal condition automatically.
JAN-701
Brilliance control
JAN-901M
Brilliance control
Note:
For JAN-901M, pressing the brilliance control will automatically adjust the screen s brightness to an
optimal condition.
When the adjustment is completed, AUTO ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE will appear on the display.
Press the brilliance control again to erase the indication.

2.2 Function of the Screen
The screen consists of two areas, the chart display area and display panel (information display area). The menu title
bar appears when this equipment enters the menu mode.
2
Menu title bar < MENU
North arrow mark <MENU
Chart display area Display panel

Message display area 1 Message display area 2
Chart Display Area:

The chart display area displays the electronic chart stored on hard disk. (S-57, C-MAP and/or ARCS charts)
On the chart, the following will be displayed according to your settings:
Your ships symbol and vector at the primary position
Your ships symbol and vector at the secondary position
Head line
Primary position track and time label
Secondary position track
EBL/VRM markers
RADAR echo
Other ship symbols, vectors and ships track (when ARPA/AIS is installed)
etc.
Also, various screen panels will be displayed on electronic charts according to the function in use.
Message Display Area 1:

When an alarm occurs, an alarm display button (see 2.2.1 Display Panel) will flash, and the details of the alarm
will be displayed at the same time. When multiple alarms occur at the same time, the detailed alarm information
will be displayed alternately for fixed intervals. When an alarm is released (see 3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm
([ALARM ACK])), the details of the alarm will no longer be displayed.
Message Display Area 2:

Position shifts and other caution messages will be displayed. These messages will be displayed as long as the
condition persists. No alarms will occur even if a message is displayed in this area.

Display Panel:
The display panel displays various navigation information for sailing including alarms. Also, buttons that will be
frequently used for navigation operation are arranged in this panel.
Memo: All of the button functions in the display panel can be accomplished by the menu operation.
Menu Title Bar:

When the [MENU] button on the display panel is left-clicked, the menu title bar opens on top of the screen to allow
menu operation.
Left-clicking the [MENU] button once again or left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.

2.2.1 Display Panel
The contents of display panel will change according to the chart being selected, either S-57/C-MAP or ARCS. The
following shows the typical displays common to S-57/C-MAP and ARCS.
Name of positioning system
Name of primary system position
2
Geodetic system name
[MENU] button used to enter the menu mode.
Course and speed of primary (The vector of the vessels motion over
the ground.)
Ships heading
Log speed (speed through the water)
Course to steer (CTS) (It is displayed during Automatic Sailing.)
Vector time
Depth
Date and time of Local Mean Time. ( ) shows the time zone.
Current primary system position (Latitude/Longitude)
Route name being selected (UNLOAD appears if nothing is selected.

Drop-down list shows all route names.)
Next waypoint being selected (Drop-down list shows the selectable

waypoints manually.)
Auto sailing status. See Auto Sailing Status Panel on page 2-11.
Information panel for To WP, XTD, Dest WP, Route and

Drift. See page 2-10 and 2-11.
The contents of this CHART panel differs depending on the chart type.
For S-57/C-MAP, see page 2-8. For ARCS, see page 2-9.
Alarm display buttons. Up to 3 alarm names and the number of alarms

are displayed. e.g. ARR (Arrival) To see all alarms, left-click the [Alarm
List] button. You will see the detailed description of each alarm.
Software keyboard.
See 3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard.
Displays the system name from which information is received.

RADAR 1 ARPA 1 AIS
AIS (Automatic Identifica-
tion System)
ARPA 1, ARPA2, or ARPA 1/2
RADAR 1 or RADAR 2
Coordinate of the cursor position (C : Cursor)
Bearing and distance from own ship

(1) CHART Panel
CHART Panel for S-57/C-MAP
When left-clicked, shows the registered port name list. Selected port
name position will be displayed on the chart.
When left-clicked, EVENT mark is put at the own ship position.
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information level selec-

tion buttons. When the button is lit in green, corresponding SENC is
displayed.
BASE: Shows basic information such as geographic area. (This is not
intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.)
STANDARD:
Shows standard information (First selection at power ON).
!: Shows all objects that belong to standard information.
OTHER: Shows all information.
The selecting Drop-down list is lit in green.
Scale of the chart being displayed (Drop-down list shows all avail-
able scales.)
Range of the chart being displayed (Drop-down list shows all avail-
able ranges.)
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)

True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is auto-
matically shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays on the screen and the geographic ob-
jects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.
Azimuth (selectable with the drop-down list button)

North Up: The chart always orients north.
Course Up:Your ships heading always faces up on the screen. (The
chart rotates. This is effective in the relative mode.)
Rotation: You can rotate the chart by the specified amount using
the degree specifying box on this panel.
Rotational degree entry box for Azimuth Rotation.
When Fix button is clicked (in red), the currently displayed chart is
held even if zoom in or zoom out are used.
HOME: Displays your ship on the screen.
Zoom Area: You can magnify the specified area using a rubber
band.
Wide View: You can display additional wide range view in the dis-
play panel area, which makes you easier to see your
ships geometric position.
Zoom In: You can magnify the range.

Zoom Out: You can reduce the range.

CHART Panel for ARCS
2
Note:
Function of the [EVENT], [PORT LIST] and [HOME] but-
tons is the same as for S-57/C-MAP.
Displays the geodetic system of the chart.
Displays the original scale of the chart.
Scale of the chart being displayed
Range of the chart being displayed
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)

True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is auto-
matically shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays at the center of the chart and the geo-
graphic objects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.
Chart offset values
Selects a larger chart.
Selects a smaller chart.
Opens the Select Chart panel. You can select the ARCS chart
you want. See, 3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only).

(2) To WP, XTD, Dest WP, Route and Drift Panels
To WP:
Distance from the ship to the next waypoint

Bearing from the ship to the next waypoint
Estimated Time To Go to the next waypoint
Estimated Time of Arrival at the next waypoint
Speed to arrive at the next waypoint by the planned time
XTD :
Track deviation (Deviation from the direct route.)
Cross Track Limit (Port side)
Cross Track Limit (Starboard side)
Dest WP:
Select from Actual Speed / Calc. Ave. Speed / Calc. ETA

Actual Speed:
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the
destination No. by the actual speed
Calc. Ave. Speed:
Displays speed to the destination No. by the setting of
estimated time of arrival
Calc. ETA:
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the
destination No. by the setting of speed
Destined waypoint (selectable from the drop-down list)
Speed to arrive at the destined waypoint by the estimated time of arrival
Distance from own ship to the waypoint. (Not the straight-line dis-
tance, but the total distance of the leg.)
Time To Go to the destined waypoint
Estimated Time of Arrival at the destined waypoint

Route:
New course after arrival of the next waypoint
Name of waypoint displayed at To WP
Latitude of the next waypoint
Longitude of the next waypoint
2
Estimated Time of Arrival at the final waypoint
Total sum of distance between the own ship and the starting WP0.
New Course
To WP
Own Ship
Drift: [New Course]
Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG

and HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG and

HDG vectors.
(3) Auto Sailing Status Panel

The auto sailing status panel will be displayed as follows:
Displays the autopilot steering mode.

See the autopilot instruction manual for descriptions of the various steer-
ing modes.
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing BLANK: Not Auto Sailing

MAN: Manual Turning mode KEEP: Keep tracking the current leg
AUTO: Auto Turning mode DIRECT: Direct route to Waypoint
TURN: Changing the steering
AVOID: Under ship-avoiding operation
NotRDY: Not ready to Auto Sailing (The route has not been loaded, or a POS1,
Gyro, Log, or A/P alarm has occurred.)
READY: Ready to Auto Sailing
CONV: Conventional (Normal) type Auto Sailing
ANTS: ANTS type Auto Sailing
Note:
To use auto sailing feature, the Auto Pilot equipment must be connected.

2.2.2 Menu Title Bar
When the [MENU] button on the display panel is left-clicked, the menu title bar opens and you can access to
various menus.
[MENU] Button
The following shows the menu trees:
Table 2.2 Menu Tree
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference

(1) Cursor (1) Scroll 3.6.2
(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(3) High Resolution Area 3.8
(4) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(5) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(6) Remove EBL/VRM (1) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(7) Running Fix 3.18
(8) Remove Running Fix 3.18
(9) ARPA Manual Acq
(1) ARPA Release
(2) Activate AIS 3.3.9
(3) Deactivate AIS 3.3.9
(4) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information 3.13
(5) Other Information 3.13
(6) Maneuver Curve 3.19
(7) Remove Maneuver Curve 3.19
(8) Cross Bearing... 3.20
(0) Option... 3.17.2.1
(2) Chart (1) Marking / Highlighting (1) Event-Mark 3.12.1
(2) Information Mark 3.12.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark 3.12.3
(4) Highlight 3.12.4
(5) Delete Event-Mark... 3.12.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position... 3.6.5
(2) Add to my Port List... 3.22.1
(3) My Port List... 3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home 3.6.1
(3) ARCS (1) Select Chart under Cursor 3.8.3
(2) Select Chart from all... 3.8.4

Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued

(2) Chart (3) Change Active Panel 3.8.5
(4) Load Low Resolution
(5) Note and Diagram
3.8.6
3.8.8 2
(6) Temporary and Preliminary 3.8.9
(7) Adjust Datum Offset... 3.8.10
(8) Datum Transformation... 3.8.10
(4) Select S-57 Chart... 3.9
(5) User Charts (1) Select User Chart... 3.10
(2) Chart Editor... 5.3
(3) Unselect User Charts 3.10
(6) Manual UpDating... 5.1, 5.4.2
(7) Scale (1) Select Scale 3.7.4
(2) Select Range 3.7.3
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(8) Azimuth (1) North Up 3.21.2
(2) Course Up 3.21.2
(3) Rotation 3.21.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.21.1
(2) Relative 3.21.1
(3) Free 3.21.1
(1) Fix View 3.21.3
(2) Accept S-57 Updates 3.11
(3) Print Display 3.30
(4) Save Screen 3.31
(0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS... 3.24.1
(2) Other Charts... 3.24.2
(3) Scale... 3.24.3
(3) Ship (1) Adjust (1) Cursor 3.28.1
(2) Enter Position... 3.28.2
(3) Enter Offset... 3.28.3
(4) Clear Offset 3.29
(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor (1) Create Monitoring Circle 3.26
(2) Clear Monitoring Circle 3.26
(0) Option... 3.16, 3.16.1 -- 3.16.5
(4) View (1) Day-Night (1) Day Bright 3.3.6
(2) Day Whiteback 3.3.6
(3) Day Blackback 3.3.6
(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(6) Panel Dimmer 3.3.5
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) Range Rings 3.3.8


(4) View (4) Guard Zone1
(5) Guard Zone2
(3) ARPA / AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS 3.3.9
(5) ALL 3.3.9
(6) ARPA Release ALL
(7) Deactivate All AIS 3.3.9
(8) ALL List 3.3.9
(9) Select List 3.3.9
(4) Analog Meter 3.15
(5) Logbook 3.23.1
(6) Multi View (1) Single View 3.14.1
(2) Top Bottom 3.14.1
(3) Right Left 3.14.1
(4) Right Top View 3.14.1
(5) Left Top View 3.14.1
(6) Right Bottom View 3.14.1
(7) Left Bottom View 3.14.1
(8) Select Area 3.14.2
(9) Wide Range View 3.14.3
(0) Option (1) Radar... 3.27.1
(2) Guard Zone
(3) ARPA/AIS... 3.27.2
(4) Display Panel 3.15
(5) Logbook... 3.23.2
(6) Voyage Distance Clear 3.27.5
(7) Date / Time... 3.27.6
(5) Route (1) Select Route... 3.4.2
(2) Unload Route 3.4.2
(3) Select Next WP... 3.4.2
(4) Create Alternate Route 4.2.1, 4.2.2
(5) Planning (1) Table Editor 4.1.2
(2) Graphic Editor 4.1.3
(6) Calculate Distance to Run 3.4.3
(0) Option... 4.1.1
(6) Auto Sail (1) Start... 6.3.2
(2) Stop 6.3.3
(3) Start Avoiding
(4) Stop Avoiding
(0) Option... 6.2
(7) Alarm (1) List... 3.3.7
(2) History... 3.3.7
(0) Option... 3.3.5, 3.25


(8) Tool (1) File Manager... 7.1
(2) Chart Portfolio... (1) Create
(2) Top Window
8.1
8.1 2
(3) Chart Abbreviation 7.2
(4) Navigation Data Graphs...
(5) Set User Key 7.3
(6) Bilingual
(9) Maintenance (1) Connection... 7.4
(2) Sensors... 7.5
(3) Color Test... 7.6
(0) For Engineer Installation manual
(0) Exit 3.32

3
Basic
Operation
of ECDIS
3-1
Do not place any object on the operation panel.
Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
Notes on Description:
(1) Keys/Buttons/dials/menu names:
The keys on the operation panel, buttons on the display panel and the menu names are written as [xxxx] in this
book.
Example:
[RADAR] key (on the operation panel)
[MENU] button (on the display panel)
[(1) Cursor] (menu name)
(2) Menu operation description:

The sequential operation to access to a menu is written as follows:
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
You will learn how to access to a menu later.
Before starting operation, please understand how to operate the menu referring to 3.1 Menu Operation.
The flowchart described in 3.2 General Flowchart will give you general procedure for this equipment.
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-2

3.1 Menu Operation
To operate this equipment, it is necessary to know how to select menus and set options in the menus.
Basic procedure to access to a menu and set options using the trackball section are described here. Also, major
panel (dialog box, etc.) types that will appear during operation, and how to enter numbers and letters are described.
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu 3

3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball
Trackball section on the operation panel
Trackball:
Trackball The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen
(Moves the cursor.) for position designation, selection of buttons on the dis-
play panel, menu designation, etc.
Left button:
Left button
Right button Used for fixing and selecting a position on the chart, or
(Left-click)
(Right-click) selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.
Pressing the left button is written as left-click in this
book.
Right button (Shortcut menu selection button):

Used for displaying a shortcut menu on the screen.
Pressing the right button is written as right-click in
this book.
Major cursors
Cross Cursor Lens Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart. Appears when area zoom function is se-
lected. The rubber band can be drawn
Marking Cursor to magnify an area.
Appears while in User Chart Edit/Manual
Update mode and Route Graphic mode. Hand Cursor
Used to add objects and WPs. Appears when the cursor is moved while
pressing and holding down the left but-
Edit Cursor ton in the chart area. You can grip and
Appears while in User Chart Edit/Manual move the chart freely.
Update mode and Route Graphic mode.
Used to change objects and WPs. Box Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart while
Arrow Cursor (Pointer) in User Chart Edit/Manual Update mode
Indicates the position on the display panel, and Route Graphic mode.
menu title bar and panel (dialogue box, etc.)
3-3 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu
As for example, the following menu operation is described here.
The general menu selection procedure is as follows:

(1) Opening the menu (entering Menu mode)
(2) Selecting the menu
(3) Selecting the submenu/options
(1) Opening the menu

For opening the menu, left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel of the screen as follows:
The menu title bar appears on the upper part of the screen.
[Menu Title Bar]
Step-by-step operation to press the [MENU] button on the display panel:

1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the [MENU] button.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [MENU] button.
Then the menu title bar will open.
Explained as Left-click the [MENU] button.
The menu title bar opens.
How to close the menu:

Left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel or left-click at any position on the chart.

(2) Selecting [(2) Chart] ([MENU] - [(2) Chart])
Select the [(2) Chart] on the menu title bar.
The Chart menu will open.
Step-by-step operation to select [(2) Chart] menu:

1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to [(2) Chart] on the menu title bar.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [(2) Chart] menu.
Then, the [(2) Chart] menu will open.
Explained as Left-click [(2) Chart].
The [(2) Chart] menu opens.

(3) Selecting [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark]
1) Left-click [(1) Marking/Highlighting] on the Chart menu.
Then, the Marking/Highlighting submenu will open.
2) Left-click [(2) Information Mark].
Then, the Location/Attribute panel will open.
Shifting the cursor

will also open the
submenu.
How to Close the Panel:

Left-click the [OK] button or [Cancel] button.
[OK]: Enables settings in the panel and close the panel.
[Cancel]: Close the panel without changing the contents of the panel.

3.1.1.3 How to Use the Shortcut Menu
You may use the shortcut menu by pressing the right button (by right-clicking).
Example 1: By right-clicking on the chart display
Right-clicking the chart may open a short-

cut menu.
Left-click a menu item you want.

3
e.g. Zoom In.
Example 2: By right-clicking on the chart display while performing operation
Right-clicking on the chart may open a shortcut menu.
Left-click Abort to abort the current operation step.

3.1.2 Various Panels
The major panel types that will appear on the screen and how to operate them are described here.
Value entry box

You can enter numbers.
1) First, left-click the arrow mark or the entry box.
2) Next, enter the value.
3) To fix the entry, select other value entry box, if
any, or the [ENT] key.
Drop-down list
1) Left-click the button to open the drop-
down list.
2) Left-click an item you want from the
list.
Text box
You can enter numbers and letters.
How to enter, see 3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters.

Tabs
You can display one of panels by selecting a tab.
1) Left-click one of tabs to display a panel.
Check box
Left-click the item to turn it ON or 3
OFF.
The check mark ( ) shows that the
selected item is set to ON.
Option button (Radio button)

You can select one of items you want.
Left-click one of items to turn it ON.
(Other items are automatically tuned
OFF.) The check mark ( ) shows the
selected item.
List box
You can select any item in the list.
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark ( ) shows that the selected item is set to
ON.
To scroll up/down the list:

Left-click the [UP]/[DOWN] button.
While left-clicking the scroll bar, move the trackball so
that it moves upward or downward.
The scroll bar will be located on the right side or at the

bottom of the panel.
Command buttons
Left-click the button to perform the button function.

3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters
You can enter numbers and letters into the value entry box or text box using the alphanumeric graphic buttons on the
display or optional full key board.
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard
Note:
You cannot enter letters using the PS/2 keyboard in case an optional PS/2 keyboard is not installed.
1) Loosen the 2 screws in front of the equipment that fasten the PS/2 keyboard.
Screws (2 places)
2) Pull out the PS/2 keyboard.
Put in the PS/2 keyboard in the reverse order and fix it firmly when you place it.

3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard
Left-click [Keyboard] of [Alarm List] button.
On the operation panel
Press the [OPTION2] key.
The software keyboard will be displayed.
3
[Keyboard]
Like the PS/2 keyboard, numbers/characters/symbols can be input by clicking the keys on the software keyboard.
To switch between uppercase and lowercase characters, left-click the [Shift] button. While the [Shift]+[Lock] but-
ton is enabled, the uppercase input mode is active, and the [Shift]+[Lock] button is displayed on a yellowish green
background. To close the software keyboard, left-click the [Close] button.
[Shift] button [Close] button
Uppercase and lowercase characters are switched each time

the [Shift] button is left-clicked.
Note:
The software keyboard may not be displayed depending on the system configuration used.

3.1.3.3 Numerical Input
This arrow mark shows the entry box.
Procedure to enter value:

1) Left-click the arrow mark or the value entry box.
3534.998N
Black underlines
Red underline
2) To change the value with the red underline, press the numeric keys on the operation panel.
Then, the red underline moves to the next value.
For example, press [3] and then [3].
3334.998N
Black underline
Red underline
Black underline
3) To change the value with the red underline, press the numeric keys on the operation panel.
Then, the red underline moves to the next value.
For example, press [4] and then [5].
3345.998N
Black underline
Red underline
Black underline
4) Change the value 998 in the same way.

5) To fix the entry, press the [ENT] key.
How to switch between N (North) and S (South):

To change the line under N into red, point the cursor at N by moving the trackball and left-click. To
switch the letter N and S by turnes, press [0] to [9] or [A] to [Z].
The same procedure applies to E (East) and W (West).

3.1.3.4 Character Input
This section explains the character input rules.
To input an uppercase character from the software keyboard, click the [Shift] button to enable, and then click the
character button.
Example: Input [M].
Click the [Shift] button, confirm that the [Shift] button is enabled turning royal blue and that the
button display has changed to the uppercase mode, and then click the [M] button.
To input an uppercase character from the optional PS/2 keyboard, press the character key while holding down the 3
[Shift] key.
Example: Input [M].
Press the [M] key while holding down the [Shift] key.
Example of inputting the characters Note 1:
Text box
1) Left-click on the arrow mark or in the text box. The cursor will appear in the text box.
2) With the software keyboard, enable the [Shift] button and left-click the [N] button to input [N].
With the PS/2 keyboard, press the [N] key to input [N] while holding down the [Shift] key.
N Character cursor
3) Press the [O] button to input o.
No
4) Press the [T] button to input t.
Not
5) Press the [E] button to input e.
Note
6) Press the [1] button, and press the [ENTER] key to fix the entry.
Note1
Editing of input characters:

If you input Nott by mistake, press the [Backspace/<-] button.
The last-input t will be deleted. The rightmost character is deleted each time the [Backspace/<-] button is
pressed.
If you input Notte by mistake, turn the trackball to insert the cursor between the tt, and left-click.
Then, press the [Backspace/<-] button to delete the first-input t. Alternatively, press the [Delete] button to
delete the second t.
The character following the cursor is deleted each time the [Delete] button is pressed.

3.2 General Flowchart
The following shows a general flowchart to use JAN-901 and the flowchart for sailing.
3.2.1 General Flowchart

[Startup Menu] [Startup Screen]
Power switch ON
Startup Menu
selection
Input ARCS PIN

(ARCS only)
Startup Screen [MENU] button
[Navigation & Planning Screen]

Navigation & Planning
Screen The [Startup Screen] will be auto-
matically displayed if [ ] is left-
clicked or no operation is con-
Adjustments ducted for 10 seconds.
Screen brightness Display panel
Operation panel brightness (Information
Sound volume
display area)
Radar echo, etc.
(For detailed description, see 3.2.2 Flowchart

Sailing for Sailing.)
Chart display area
(From the menu )

ROUTE selection
WP selection Operation panel
Rout Planning
operation
Table editing
Graphical editing
Display panel
Sailing monitoring operation User chart making/
Alarm monitor editing
(Arrival, Route, etc.) [MENU]
Menu operation
Chart Portfolio
(S-57 chart updating)
Create alternate
route
Exit and shutdown Press the [POWER] key.
Power switch OFF

3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing
Sailing start
Alarms:
If an alarm occurs, the alarm panel will blink in red and a sound will be heard.
Check the alarm contents and, after confirming it, press the [ALARM ACK]
key on the operation panel. Pressing the [Alarm List] button on the display
panel shows the alarm contents. (For detailed description, see 3.3.7 How to
Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)
3
Select a route name you want from the display panel. (Initially "UNLOAD" is
Select ROUTE shown.)
Select To WP Select the To WP (for example 1 or AUTO SELECT).
Move you ship to the sea Move your ship manually. Your ship will always be displayed on the chart.
Your ship's symbol
Ship's bearing
To WP
Note:
Be sure that the background color is not
sky blue. If it is sky blue, your ship posi-
tion is shifted by the offset function. In
this case, return its color to gray. See,
3.29 Canceling the Ship Offset.
Bearing to the To WP
About Auto Sailing:

You can use automatic sailing when using together with an Auto Pilot equipment. For details, see chapter 6 Auto-
matic Sailing.

Flowchart for Sailing -- Continued
When the ship crosses a waypoint boundary, there will be an updated next
Route monitoring WP, and an ARR (arrival) alarm occurs.
("ARR (Arrival)" occurs
when arrived at the WP.) After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm.
It repeats itself until the

ship arrives at the last WP
before the final destina-
tion.
When the ship exceeds the boundary of the final destination , "ROUTE" alarm
Arrived at the final destination will occur.
("ROUTE" alarm occurs.) After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the op-
eration panel or the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm.
Unload the route Select "UNLOAD". Then the route selected disappears from the screen.
End of sailing

3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation
How to turn the power ON and OFF and preparation before sailing are described here.
Note that, when you turn the power OFF, you must terminate the system by following the termination sequence
described here.
Also, how to recover the system in case of hung up is explained.
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER]) 3

Press the [POWER] key.
The power turns on, and the [PWR] key will light. After a short while, the startup menu will be displayed.
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
[POWER] key
When ON: Lighting

3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu
The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the Startup menu will be displayed.
You can select one of items.
Navigation & Planning
If [ ] is left-clicked, the [Startup screen] will first appear, and then the Navigation & Planning screen will be
displayed.
Chart Portfolio
You can update the S-57 chart. Left-clicking this menu will open the chart portfolio screen. (See chapter 8 Chart
Portfolio.)
Playback
You can play back the sailing you have made. Left-clicking this menu will open the playback screen. (See
chapter 9 Playback.)
Color Pattern
Displays the S-57 chart color pattern. (See 10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57))
Gray Scale
Displays the gray scale for the color test. (See 10.2.2 Gray Scale)
Note:
The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10 seconds.
[Startup Menu]

3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only)
1) If ARCS has been installed, the ARCS PIN panel will be displayed after [Navigation & Planning] is
selected in the Startup menu. Input the ARCS PIN and left-click on the [OK] button. The [Startup screen]
will be displayed if the inputted ARCS PIN is correct and the [OK] button is left-clicked on the ARCS
PIN panel, or if the [Cancel] button has been left-clicked. If ARCS has not been installed, however, the
ARCS PIN panel will not be displayed. The [Startup screen] will be displayed instead.
3
Note:
ARCS will not be displayed unless a correct
ARCS PIN is inputted on the ARCS PIN
panel.
ARCS will not be displayed if the [Cancel]
button is left-clicked on the ARCS PIN
panel.
The ARCS PIN panel is displayed only
once after [Navigation & Planning] is se-
lected.
To show the ARCS PIN panel again after
left-clicking [Cancel], turn off the power of
ECDIS, and then, turn it on again to resume
the startup procedure.
ARCS will not be displayed after its contract
term has expired.
Note:
Use the software keyboard or PS/2
keyboard to input ARCS PIN.
Be sure to carefully read the caution
displayed on the startup screen.
[Startup Screen]

2) After the Startup screen appears, the Navigation & Planning screen will be displayed after a short while.
[Navigation & Planning Screen (Example)]

3.3.4 Power OFF Operation
The power is turned off and the [POWER] key light goes out.
[POWER] key
When OFF: Unlit
3
Note:
If the [POWER] key is pressed during Navigation & Planning, the [Startup Menu] will be displayed
momentarily, but the power will eventually be turn off.
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume

Perform the following adjustments as required.
(1) Brightness of the screen ([BRILL])

Adjust the Brilliance control on the LCD monitor to adjust the brightness on the screen.
JAN-701 JAN-901M
Brilliance control
Brilliance control

(2) Brightness of the operation panel ([PANEL])
Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [PANEL] key.
Each time you press the key, the brightness changes.
You can adjust the brightness in five steps.
Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(1) Day-Night] - [(6) Panel Dimmer] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(1) Day-Night] - [(6) Panel Dimmer] in that order.
The Panel panel will appear.
2) The panel brightness is changed in five steps by left-clicking the [Adjust Panel Dimmer] button.
(3) Volume Adjustment

Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(0) Option] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart editing menu
The Alarm List Option panel will appear.

2) The alarm volume is changed in seven steps by left-clicking the [Adjust Volume] button.*1
3) Set the output of sound. Volume is a setting value of the [Adjust Volume] button.
OFF1 or OFF2 is used to connect with the Watch Alarm System. Usually use the level in DE-
FAULT.
Sound Level
Alarm
DEFAULT OFF1 OFF2
AUTO 3
CALL
Setup
A/P
POS1
POS2
JUMP
DIFF
GYRO
LOG
LowSP
The sound level of OFF2
ARR
varies depending on the
OffCo
setting during installa-
XTE
tion. *2
Route
Radar
ARPA
Chart
ARCS
SfCnt
AREA
DNG
Anch
Timer
HARD
: Alarm sounds.
: Alarm will not sound.
*1 The volume of key click sound remains the same regardless of the sound level setting.
*2 The sound level of OFF2 varies depending on the setting between this equipment and the Watch
Alarm System during installation.
While relay output to the Watch Alarm System is set, the alarm does not sound.

3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])
You can change the display color to obtain optimum display matched with the lighting conditions on the bridge.
Select one of the following display colors
Day Bright
Day Whiteback (For S-57/C-MAP only)
Day Blackback
Dusk (For S-57/C-MAP only)
Night
Key operation:
Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key.
Each time you press the key, the display color changes.
Menu operation:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(1) Day-Night] in that order, and then select one of items you want.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(1) Day-Night] in that order.
The mark will be attached to the selected item.
In the following screen, [(1) Day Bright] is selected.
When you select one of items, the menu closes and the display color of the screen will be changed.
Note:
When you change display colors, note that a [Night] color especially can make displayed information
difficult to read/see.

3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])
When an alarm occurs, a buzzer sound and the alarm button on the display panel blinks to notify the operator of an
alarm. At the same time, the details of the alarm are displayed in Message Display Area 1. When multiple alarms
occur at the same time, the alarm display will change at a fixed interval. To notify the alarm, three alarm buttons
and the [Alarm List] button are used. The three buttons are used to display the abbreviated name of the alarm.
While the [Alarm List] button is used to open the Alarm panel to see the details of the alarm.
After confirming the contents of the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or left-click the
alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm. The details of alarms that have been stopped will not be
3
displayed in Message Display Area 1. You can display the history of alarms by using the menu operation. (See 3.23
Logbook)
Note:
Do not stop the alarm unless you confirmed its cause.
Memo: For alarm settings, see 3.25 Setting the Alarm Options.
(1) When no alarm is found

If no alarm is found, only the [Alarm List] button is displayed and the button lights in green.
Nothing is displayed here.
Lights in green.
(2) When an alarm occurs

The alarm and the [Alarm List] button blink in red and an alarm sounds.
Up to three alarms can be displayed here.

Blinks in red.
Shows the number of alarms.
(3) Stopping the blinking alarm

1) Confirm what kind of alarm has occurred.
Press the [ALARM ACK] key.
The blinking alarm will stay lit.
- Left-clicking the alarm button (e.g. [ARR]) on the display panel will also stop the alarm.
To confirm the alarm contents, see (4) Opening the alarm list in page 3-27.
ALARM
Blinks in red. Blinks in red. ACK Stays lit in red. Stays lit in red.
or
Left-click the alarm
button (e.g. [ARR])

Example:
If an XTE (Cross Track Error) occurs, the XTE alarm occurs and the [XTE] button blinks in red.
Blinking stops when you press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or when you left-click the
[XTE] button on the display panel, and the [XTE] button stays in red.
When the ship enters the limit, the [XTE] alarm is released and the alarm name XTE disappears from
the button.
Also, if the ship enters the limit during blinking the alarm, the alarm is released.
Note:
The alarm lit or blining in red disappears only when the alarm cause is removed.
2) If two or more alarms have occurred, confirm the cause of alarms and press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel repeatedly until all alarms stop.
Left-clicking the alarm button repeatedly will also stop the alarms.
To stop the blinking alarms, you can repeatedly left-click the left-most alarm button. (As you press the
left-most alarm button, the alarm not yet stopped will shift to the left for easy alarm stopping operation.)

(4) Opening the alarm list
1) At any time, left-click the [Alarm List] button on the display panel.
Then, the Alarm List panel opens.
If you open the Alarm List panel when the alarm blinks, the alarm button in the Alarm List also
blinks.
After confirmation, you can stop the blinking alarm by left-clicking the alarm button in the Alarm
List. The color of the left-clicked button stays lit in red.
3
You can also open the Alarm List panel from the menu:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(1) List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Alarm] - [(1) List] in that order.
The Alarm List panel opens.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm List panel.
Button blinks in red:

The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Button stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
Button changes to green when the alarm cause is removed.
Button in green: No alarm.
Button in gray (inactive button):

The alarm does not occur in the current system configuration.

(5) Displaying the alarm history table
You can display the alarm history on the sailing.
Note:
The alarm history is cleared once [Navigation & Planning] exits. To check the past alarm lists,
see 3.23 Logbook.
Menu operation:
Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(2) History] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Alarm] - [(2) History] in that order.
Then, the Alarm History panel opens.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm History panel.
Alarm: Alarm category

Message: Detailed description of the alarm
Date/Time: Date when the alarm is acknowledged
Acknowledge: Date when the alarm is checked
Remove: Date when the causes of the alarms are removed

3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])
You can turn ON/OFF the radar image on the chart. The radar image can be adjusted with the dials on the operation
panel.
Note:
To display a radar image, the optional rader board must be installed on the unit. Also, a radar image
must be sent from the radar system.
It is not possible to display the image from the Radar in chart conversion by Chart Portfolio.
3
If the radar system displays a short-range image, and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the same
time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 10 steps (0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/12/
24/48/96/120nm).
For ARCS, the available display range differs depending on the chart displayed. If a display range
beyond 120nm is selected, the radar image will be turned off automatically.
Memo: For Radar settings, see 3.27.1 Setting Radar Options.
(1) Radar display ON/OFF from the menu

Turning ON/OFF the Radar 1:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(1) Radar 1], the Radar 1 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(1) Radar 1].
The menu is closed and the image from the Radar 1 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
Turning ON/OFF the Radar 2:

Each time you left-click [(2) Radar 2], the Radar 2 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(2) Radar 2].
The image from the Radar 2 will be superimposed on the chart.
Turning ON/OFF the Range Rings:

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(3) Range Rings], the range ring display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(3) Range Rings].
The range rings will be superimposed on the chart.

(2) Radar display ON/OFF from the operation panel
Press the [RADAR] key.
The image from the radar selected by the menu operation above will be superimposed on the chart.
To clear the image, press the key again.
RADAR
(3) Radar image adjustment (on the operation panel)
Note:
If menu panel adjustment ([(4) View] -[(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] Rader Option panel) is se-
lected, the following dials do not work. In this case, change the menu setting to activate the dials.
For details, see 3.27.1 Setting Radar Options.
[VIDEO]: Adjusting the brightness of radar echoes

The [VIDEO] dial adjusts the brightness of radar echoes. Turning the [VIDEO] dial to the right increases the
brightness. Adjust to the best brightness to view radar echoes.
[RAIN]: Suppressing rain and snow clutter

The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial (ANTI-CLUTTER
RAIN dial) to the right enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in images of rain and snow.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also reduces sea clutter.
So, using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep this dial turned as far as possible
to the left.
[SEA]: Suppressing sea clutter

The [SEA] dial lowers the reception sensitivity in near distances to reduce sea clutter. Turning the [SEA] dial
(ANTI-CLUTTER SEA dial) to the right increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets like buoys and small boats.
[GAIN]: Adjusting sensitivity

The [GAIN] dial adjusts the reception sensitivity of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the right
increases the reception sensitivity and widens the distances in which RADAR echo can be observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the contrast and
makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view near distances or screens containing closely packed
targets, decreases the reception sensitivity making targets easier to view.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets.

3.3.9 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([AIS/ARPA])
You can turn ON/OFF the ARPA/AIS target information on the chart using the operation panel or from the menu.
Notes:
ARPA information is displayed only when it is received from the ARPA radar system.
AIS information can be displayed only when it is received from the AIS receiver.
For ARPA/AIS target settings, see 3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options.

3
(1) ARPA/AIS display ON/OFF using the operation panel
Press the [AIS/ARPA] key.
The target information sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.
AIS/
ARPA
(2) ARPA/AIS display ON/OFF from the menu

ARPA 1, ARPA 2 and AIS can be independently selected. Selecting ALL can turns ON and OFF ARPA 1,
ARPA 2 and AIS displays at the same time.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(1) ARPA 1], - [(2) ARPA 2], - [(4) AIS], or - [(5) ALL]
in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(1) ARPA 1], - [(2) ARPA 2], - [(4) AIS], or - [(5) ALL]
in that order.
Each time you select [(1) ARPA 1], [(2) ARPA 2], or [(4) AIS], its display is turned ON and OFF.
When you select [(5) ALL], items [(1) ARPA 1], [(2) ARPA 2], and [(4) AIS] are simultaneously turned
ON and OFF.
When the selected item is turned ON, the mark is attached.

(3) Opening the ARPA/AIS list
Note that the items Bearing, Distance, CPA and TCPA in the table are the filtered value by the
ARPA/AIS option settings. See 3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(8) ALL List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(8) ALL List] in that order.
The ARPA/AIS List panel opens.
2) Perform the following operation.
Left-click one of the tabs, to open the ARPA - Port, ARPA-Starboard, or AIS list.
When you opened AIS panel, the [View AIS Detail] button becomes active.
Left-click the [Close] button to close the ARPA/AIS List panel.
List items:
The items are the same for ARPA-Port, ARPA-Starboard and AIS. The P1, P2, etc. are the target number.
Bearing: Bearing to the ARPA/AIS target
Distance: Distance to the ARPA/AIS target
Heading: Heading of the ARPA/AIS target
Course: Course of the ARPA/AIS target
Speed: Speed of the ARPA/AIS target
Position of the ARPA/AIS target
CPA (Closest Point of Approach)
TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach)
Status: Status of the ARPA/AIS target

[View AIS Detail] button function:
You can view the detailed information on AIS.
When you left-click this button, the AIS Information panel will open.
Left-click the [Close] button to close the AIS Information panel.
- Ships Name: Name of the AIS target ship

- MMSI: 9-digit unique user ID
- Status: Status of the AIS target
Sleeping
Activate
Lost
- Nav. Status: Navigation status of the AIS target
0: UNDER WAY USING ENGINE: Under way
1: AT ANCHOR: Anchoring
2: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
3. RESTRICTED MANOEUVRABILITY: Steering capabilities are limited
4: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
5: MOORED: Mooring
6: AGROUND: Grounding
7: ENGAGED IN FISHING: Fishing
8: UNDER WAY SAILING: Sailing
9: RESERVED FOR HSC: High-speed craft
10: RESERVED FOR WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
15: NOT DEFINED: Undefined
- Call Sign: Call sign on the own station (up to 7 characters)
- IMO No.: 9-digit number
- CPA: Closest point of approach to the AIS target
- TCPA: Time to closest point of approach to the AIS target
- Position Sensor: Types of sensors the AIS target uses
0: Undefined
1: GPS: GPS
2: GLONASS: GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS: GPS/GLONASS combined type
4: Loran-C: Loran-C
5: Chayka: Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System: Integrated Navigation System

7: Surveyed: Measuring type
8-15: Not used: Not used
- Position Accuracy: 0: Low, 1: High
- Ships Type: Types of AIS target
2X: WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
30: FISHING VESSEL: Fishing vessel
31: TOWING VESSEL: Towing vessel
32: TOWING VESSEL-L > 200M B -> 25M: A towing vessel having a length of 200m or longer, or a
width of 25m or longer
33: DREDGE OR UNDERWATER OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater operation): A vessel that
is dredging or conducting underwater operations
34: VESSEL-DIVING OPE (Engaged in diving operation): A vessel conducting underwater operations
35: VESSEL-MILITARY OPE (Engaged in military operation): A vessel being engaged in military operations
36: SAILING VESSEL: Sailing vessel
37: PLEASURE CRAFT: Pleasure craft
4X: HSC (High speed craft): High-speed craft
50: PILOT VESSEL: Pilot vessel
51: SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS: Salvage vessel
52: TUGS: Tugboat
53: PORT TENDERS: Tender boat
54: WITH ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIP (Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment): Clean-up vessel
55: LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS: Patrol vessel
58: MEDICAL TRANSPORTS: Medical vessel
59: RESOLUTION NO18: MOB-83 (Ships according to Resolution No18 (Mob-83)): Vessels defined
by the Radio Regulation
6X: PASSENGER SHIPS: Passenger ship
7X: CARGO SHIPS: Cargo ship
8X: TANKER: Tanker
9X: OTHER TYPE OF SHIP: Other types of ships
For categories 2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates types of loaded cargoes/status.
X1: CATEGORY A (DG/HP/MP)
X2: CATEGORY B (DG/HP/MP)
X3: CATEGORY C (DG/HP/MP)
X4: CATEGORY D (DG/HP/MP)
X9: NO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
X0: ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
For categories 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates a vessel status.
X5: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
X6: RESTRICTED BY (her ability) MANOEUVRE: Steering capabilities are limited
X7: CONSTRAINED BY (her) DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
- Latitude: The latitude at which the AIS target is situated
- Longitude: The longitude at which the AIS target is situated
- Bearing: Bearing from own ship to the AIS target
- Distance: Distance between own ship and the AIS target
- Course: Bearing of the AIS target
- Speed: Speed of the AIS target
- Length: Length of the AIS target
- Beam: Beam of the AIS target
- Draft: Draft of the AIS target
- Heading: Heading of the AIS target
- Rate of Turn: Turning speed of the AIS target
- Destination: Destination of the AIS target

(4) Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets ([AIS ACT] / [AIS IN-ACT])
The default for AIS targets is display in the inactive state. The procedures below are used for activating and
deactivating AIS targets.
Activating:
Press the [AIS ACT] key.
In the normal menu 3
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(2) Activate AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(2) Activate AIS] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Activate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is not active, then left-click on it. The AIS target
will become active, the status will be changed to active, and the vector will be displayed.
Deactivating:
Press the [AIS IN-ACT] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(3) Deactivate AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(3) Deactivate AIS] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Deactivate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is active, then left-click on it. The AIS target will
become inactive, and the vector will not be displayed.
Inactive Active
Deactivating all:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(7) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(6) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
All AIS targets will be deactivated, and the vectors will not be displayed.

(5) Panel Display of ARPA/AIS Target
Left-click on the ARPA/AIS target displayed on the screen so that ARPA/AIS information will be displayed
on the Selected Target panel.

Press the [TGT DATA] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) Other Information] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor becomes the box cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the ARPA/AIS target, and then left-click.
The Selected Target panel will open and ARPA/AIS target information will be displayed.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(9) Select List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(9) Select List] in that order.
If you wish to have the Selected Target panel open in advance,
- Up to 3 targets can be simultaneously displayed on the Selected Target panel. The target that was selected first
is displayed in the top panel. As new targets are selected and displayed, previous targets move down by one.
When the fourth target is selected, the bottom target display panel will no longer display the first target selection.
- To delete a panel display, left-click on the [Release] button provided in each panel. If there is a panel
below the deleted panel, it moves up by one.
Target Label:
Name of the ARPA/AIS target
Speed:
Bearing:
Speed of the ARPA/AIS target
Bearing towards the ARPA/AIS target
CPA:
Distance:
Closest point of approach to the
Distance to the ARPA/AIS target
AIS target
TCPA: Course:
Time to closest point of ap- Course to the ARPA/AIS target
proach to the AIS target
[Additional] tab
[Common] tab
[AIS Detail] button: Name:

When a panel is displaying AIS Name of the AIS target (not dis-
target information, the AIS played for ARPA targets)
Information panel will also be
displayed (see page 3-33 for Position:
AIS detailed information). Current position of the ARPA/AIS target
[Release] button: Status:

Release the selected target. Current status of the ARPA/AIS target

3.3.10 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations
If the power does not turn off, then hold it down for approximately 10 seconds to turn it off.
[POWER] key
3
After a while, press the [POWER] key on the operation panel to turn ON the system again.

3.3.11 Using the CD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive
Opening the panel on the front of the main unit will allow you to use the CD drive and floppy disk drive.
Floppy disk drive CD drive
Eject button: Use to open and

Access lamp: Will light green close the tray.
when the writing to or reading
Access lamp: Will light green
from a floppy disk.
when information is being read
from the CD.
Eject button: Use to eject a
floppy disk.
Note:
Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.

3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP
When you start sailing, select the ROUTE and To WP as follows: Note that the route file extension shows the route
type. More specifically, the extension .rtn is used for Normal type and .rta is used for ANTS type.
3.4.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel

(1) Selecting the route using the display panel 3
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the ROUTE list.
2) Left-click the route name you want in the drop-down list.
When you select the route name, it is read from hard disk and the route image is displayed on the chart.
The initial route status is UNLOAD.
Deleting the route:

To delete the route being selected from the chart, left-click the drop-down list button to open the ROUTE list,
and then left-click UNLOAD.
The selected route is deleted from the screen.
Notes:
If the scheduled route is on floppy disk or on the navigation workstation, you can copy it to hard
disk using the File Manager. See 7.1 File Manager.
(2) Selecting waypoint using the display panel

As you sail, the waypoint number that the ship is currently heading to is displayed.
There are two ways, automatic and manual, for selecting the waypoint number.
Automatic selection (Auto Select):

The waypoint nearest the current position becomes the next waypoint. When your ship passes this waypoint,
the waypoint is automatically updated to the next waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WP list.

2) Left-click the AUTO SELECT.

Manual selection:
To select any waypoint, manually select the waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WP list.

2) Left-click any waypoint number.
For example, when you start from the beginning of the selected
route, left-click 1 in the To WP drop-down list.
3.4.2 Selecting ROUTE and To WP from the Menu

(1) Selecting the route from the menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select Route] in that order. The Select Route panel opens.
2) Select the route by left-clicking it, and then left-click the [OK] button. Then, the selected route is dis-
played on the chart. Name of this route is displayed on the ROUTE panel of the display panel.
Left-clicking the [Display WP List] button will open the Select Next WP panel. For this panel operation,
see the next page.
To unload the selected route:

Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(2) Unload Route] in that order.
Then, the route disappears from the chart and the ROUTE panel displays UNLOAD.
- You can also delete the route from the screen by selecting UNLOAD in the ROUTE panel.

(2) Selecting the waypoint from the menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(3) Select Next WP] in that order.
The Select Next WP panel opens.
2) Select the WP you want by left-clicking it, and then left-click the [OK] button. Then, the selected WP is
displayed on the To WP panel of the display panel.

3.4.3 Calculating Distance to Run
You can calculate the distance between WPs or between own ship and a WP with the calculator (Calculating
Distance panel).
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(6) Calculate Distance to Run] in the order.
Then, the Calculating Distance panel opens.
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] panel, and select [Way Point], [Picked Point], or [Own
Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or [Own Ship], select the WP number you want from the WP No.
drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an arbitrary point
on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] panel, and select [Way Point] or [Picked Point]. If you
have selected [Way Point], select the WP number you want from the WP No. drop-down list. If you have
selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated, and the calculation result is
displayed in the [Distance] box. Left-click the [Close] button.
[Select WP/Own Ship.]
[Select WP No.] [Resultant]

Example use of [Calculate Distance] panel:
When selecting [Way Point]

WP000
Select [Way Point] and an arbitrary WP No.
3
WP001
WP003
The calculation result is displayed. WP002
The route between the selected WPs is shown in green.
When selecting [Picked Point]
Select [Picked Point], and left-click an arbitrary Own ship position WP000
point on the route.
WP001
WP003
The route from the arbitrary point to WP No. 02 you have selected is shown in green.

When selecting [Own Ship]
Own ship position WP000
Select [Own Ship].
WP001
Select WP to go through.
WP003
The route from the own ship position to WP No. 03 via selected WP is shown in green.

3.5 Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display is subdivided into three object cat-
egories, display base, standard display, and all other information. You can change the object category using the
display panel.
3
Display Base: Important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts, such as coastline and own ships safety contour.
Standard Display: Objects less important than display base, such as drying line, indication of fixed and floating
aids to navigation and boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.
Other: Other objects, such as spot soundings, submarine cables and pipelines, ferry routes and details
of all isolated dangers.
Note:
The initial chart screen status is Standard Display. For safety for sailing, use the standard display or
other information display, and not the display base.
You can change the object category by left-clicking the [BASE], [STANDARD], or [OTHER] button on the
display panel.
The illuminating button in green is the selected one. The [BASE] button is always lit.
1) Left-click either button as follows:

During sailing, select [STANDARD] or [OTHER].
Illuminated in green when selected
Left-click [STANDARD] Left-click [OTHER]
Left-click [BASE] Left-click [STANDARD]

You can also use the menu to select an object category. Also, in the [STANDARD] and [OTHER]
display methods, you can specify how objects belonging to these categories should be displayed.
will display all objects that belong to standard display and that have been set for dis-
play. will display all objects that belong to standard display.
For selection of object display, see 3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.
About the display in the chart area:

You will see all layers being selected.
For better understanding, you can think that various layers
are used to make up the chart display. For example, standard
display consists of the display base and information (objects)
for standard display. This means that the display base is the EVENT mark, ect.
Layer
basic one layer and the information for standard display is
Objects of "OTHER"
another layer, and the standard display is made up by over- Layer
lapping both layers. Objects of "STANDARD"
Another additional layers may be own ship, user chart, event Layer
mark, EBL/VRM, radar image, etc. Objects of "BASE"
Layer
Standard Display: Base and standard display are lit in green.
Other: Base, standard display and other are lit in green.

[BASE display example]
[STANDARD display example]
[OTHER display example]
Notes:
The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in the
display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not match the
chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart.

3.6 Shifting the Chart
The chart can be shifted by the following methods:
[HOME] button
Using the cross cursor (Left-click at any position on the chart)
Gripping the chart with the hand cursor (While left-clicking, move the hand cursor.)
[PORT LIST] button
Using the position entry panel 3
3.6.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button
At any time, you can shift the chart where your ship to a position in the chart area with plenty of room to advance.
This function will be helpful, if you have lost your ship on the chart.
Key operation:
Press the [HOME] key.
Menu operation:
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [HOME] button.
- You can also perform the operation from the menu.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(4) Home] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(4) Home] in that order.
Your ship will return to a

position in the chart area with
plenty of room to advance.
Own ship symbol
[Screen Display of Home Position]

3.6.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor
You can shift the chart using the cross cursor by simply left-clicking at any position on the chart. Then, the position
becomes the center of the chart.
For the detailed explanation of Motion mode, see 3.21 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode.
True Motion:
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to set it at the center of the chart.
2) Left-click at that position.
Cross cursor intersecting point
[Moving to the Center of the Screen]
Note:
If the cursor is not the cross cursor (e.g. lens cursor), select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(1) Scroll]
to return the cursor to the cross cursor. Right-clicking and selecting the shortcut menu Abort
will also return the cursor to the cross cursor.
Relative Motion:
You can shift the location of ship display within the chart view.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the location you want to set it the ship display.
2) Left-click at that position.
[Moving the location of ship display]

3.6.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor
You can grip the chart and move it freely.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you want to grip the chart.
2) While keeping left-clicked, rotate the trackball to move the chart. At this time the cursor changes to the
hand cursor
3
Hand cursor
Note:
If the ship is out of chart view, motion mode change to free automatically.
3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button

If a port is already registered, you can switch to that chart. The registered chart is displayed with the registered
scale.
To return to the original chart where the ship is there, press the [HOME] button.
Note:
Before using this function, you should register a desired position as a port. See 3.22.1 Adding to My
Port List.
(1) Button operation to jump to the port

Left-click the [PORT LIST] button.
The drop-down list for ports opens.
2) Left-click a port name you want to jump there.
The position registered as the port will be displayed at the center of the screen.
Registered position as a port

(2) Menu operation to jump to the port
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(3) My Port List] in that order.
The Marked Position panel opens, where position and scale column are shown.
- To jump to the port, left-click a port name then the [Jump] button.
- To delete the registered port, left-click a port name then the [Delete] button.
- To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
3.6.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position

You can see the chart to the position you want by entering the position in the position entry panel.
You can operate from the menu only.
To return to the original chart where your ship is, press the [HOME] button.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
The Enter Position panel opens.
2) Enter the position (latitude and longitude), and left-click the [OK]
button.
The panel closes and the chart will be displayed to the designated
position.

3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)
The chart can be zoomed in or out by the following methods:
Zoom area function using the rubber band ([Zoom Area])
Zoom in/out ([Range +/-]/[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]/Menu/Shortcut menu)
Range selection (Range drop-down list)
Scale selection (Scale drop-down list)
3
3.7.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can enlarge the area surrounded by the rubber band full in the display. You can operate using the operation
panel, display panel , or menu.
1) Select the function by performing one of the following methods:

On the display panel
Left-click the [Zoom Area] button.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(2) Zoom Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(2) Zoom Area] in that order.
Right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom Area] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor changes to the lens cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the top left of the area A you want to enlarge, and left-click there.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the bottom right of the area B you want to enlarge, and left-click there.
The rubber band surrounds the specified area to be enlarged.
After enlarged, the lens cursor returns to the cross cursor.
Selected area
[Zooming area using the rubber band]
Switching charts:
Usually, charts with different scales are displayed in the same area.
Due to the zoom in/zoom out functions, charts with a matching scale are selected and displayed.
When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and when this original scale is beyond
the range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
This equipment shows in background a chart that looks like a world map as a reference. This chart will be
displayed when charts are zoomed out to a scale of 1:1,500,000 or smaller.

3.7.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can zoom in or out using the [RANGE +/-] key, [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] button, or [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] menu.
(1) Zooming in/out using the operation panel

1) On the operation panel +
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key. RANGE
Each time the key is pressed, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount or the scale
set by the system.

- Select range or scale for the zooming method.
- For switchable ranges, see 3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only). For scales, see 3.7.4 Switch-
ing the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).
(2) Zooming in/out using the display panel

Left-click the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] button.
Each time you press the key, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount set by
the system.
(3) Zooming in/out from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom
In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu,
User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom
In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Each time you select the menu, the chart is zoomed in
or out by the amount set by the system.
Or the same result can be achieved by right-clicking on
the chart, then selecting [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] from
the shortcut menu.
Over-scale alarm:
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale occurs if the
displayed chart is more than double in size than the original data.
The vertical lines as seen in the figure on the right will be displayed
on the chart and will appear to notify lower chart accuracy and
clarity.
The vertical lines will not display if the size has been made larger
(double or more) through proper operation.
Warning lines for overscaling

3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the range of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel or using the menu.
(1) Switching the range using the display panel

Left-click the range switching drop-down list button.
2) Left-click the range in the list. The color of indicator left side of range switching drop-down list changes
green.
3
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.
Zoomed out
Zoomed in
(2) Switching the range from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(2) Select Range] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(2) Select Range] in that order.
Available ranges are displayed.
- You cannot select the inactive range. Also, this range
is locked to the radar range, so that it cannot be
changed to active.
2) Left-click the range value you want.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range
you have selected.
Inactive range

3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the scale of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel or using the menu.
(1) Switching the scale using the display panel

Left-click the scale switching drop-down list button.
2) Left-click the scale in the list.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
(2) Switching the scale using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(1) Select Scale] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(1) Select Scale] in that order.
Available scales are displayed.
2) Left-click the scale value you want.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
Note:
To enable or disable the selectable scales,
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Scale] in that order.
For details, see 3.24.3 Setting Scales. Disabled scale will be displayed inactively (faintly).
Zoomed out
Zoomed in

3.8 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)
The following display options are explained here.
High resolution area selection with the cross cursor
Larger chart/smaller chart selection (using [Larger Chart]/[Smaller Chart] buttons on the display panel, [Zoom
In]/[Zoom Out] in the shortcut menu)
Various options accessible from the menu
3
3.8.1 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only)
When you use a low resolution chart, you can display the high resolution area with the cross cursor.

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(3) High Resolution Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(3) High Resolution Area] in that order.
2) Left-click the cross cursor. Then the high resolution area is displayed on the screen with the left-clicked
position centered.
3.8.2 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)

In the ARCS chart, you can select a larger or smaller chart using the display panel, menu, or the [RANGE+/-] key
on the operation panel.

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
On the display panel

Left-click the [Larger Chart] or [Smaller Chart] button.
Each time you left-click the button, the larger chart or smaller chart will be displayed.
In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] from the shortcut menu.
Note:
An error message may be displayed when you switch a larger or smaller chart. For details of error
messages, see 14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart.

3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Select Chart under Cursor] from the shortcut menu.
Move the cursor to the desired chart with the track ball, then left-click to open the [Select Chart] panel.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
Note:
When a chart is not displayed but a corresponding chart is displayed in the display area, the area where
a chart exists will be displayed in blue and the area where a chart does not exist will be displayed in
gray.

3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)
You can select a chart from all the charts loaded in the hard disk.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(2) Select Chart from all] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(2) Select Chart from all] in that order.
The Select Chart panel opens.
3
2) Left-click the chart No. you want, and then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
You can open the Select Chart panel by left-clicking [Select Chart] button on the display
panel.

3.8.5 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)
A panel is displayed as a blue square for each chart. A selected chart will be displayed.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(3) Change Active Panel] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(3) Change Active Panel] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Change Active Panel] from the shortcut menu.
An available chart will be displayed as a blue square.
2) Left-click on the blue rectangular so that the selected chart will be displayed.
Blue square
[Selected chart]

3.8.6 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)
You can select the low resolution chart.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(4) Load Low Resolution] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(4) Load Low Resolution] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Load Low Resolution] from the shortcut menu.
3
Then, the low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.
3.8.7 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)

1) Right-click the cursor on the chart and select the High Resolution Area from the shortcut menu by left-
clicking it. Then, the orange square frame with the lens cursor appears. The area surrounded by the orange
frame shows the are to be magnified.
2) Move the cursor (orange frame) to specify the area to be magnified and left-click the cursor.
Orange frame
[Magnified chart: High resolution chart]

3.8.8 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)
You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(5) Note and Diagram] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(5) Note and Diagram] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Note and Diagram] from the shortcut menu.
The Note and Diagram panel opens.
2) When the desired items are selected, the notes and diagrams for the corresponding chart are displayed.
The panel can be closed with the [Close] button, and the chart will return to the original display position.
Note:
The note and diagram information is included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not include
such information, the notes and diagrams will not be displayed.

3.8.9 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice
(ARCS Only)
You can display the temporary and preliminary notice list of the current chart.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(6) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu 3
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(6) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
The Temporary and Preliminary panel opens.
Depending on the chart used, the items may not be displayed on the panel.
2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the Information panel of the temporary and preliminary notice list for the current chart is dis-
played as shown in the picture.
Temporary and Preliminary Notices can be displayed only when the chart has been updated.
Note:
The temporary and preliminary notices are included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such notices, they will not be displayed.

3.8.10 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)
(1) Entering offset
Note:
Do not adjust datum offset unless you need it. This adjustment will be required only when the geodetic
system of the chart is the local one and its display position is misaligned.
You can shift the chart position by entering offset values (latitude/longitude) or by using the cursor.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(7) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(7) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
The Chart Shift panel opens.
2) Enter the offset value and left-click the [OK] button.
3) When the dialogue is opened, the current offset value specified by the user is displayed.
The offset value can be cleared with the [Clear] button.
If an offset value is already input or an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, then that value
will be displayed in the [Chart Shift] panel.
When an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, pressing the [Clear] button will return the
display to that value.

Using the Cursor:
1) In the Chart Shift panel, left-click the [by Cursor] button.
The cursor type changes.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the first position. Then, move the cursor to draw the orange line to
determine the amount of offset, and left-click the cursor at the second position.
Then, the offset values thus obtained are displayed on the Chart Shift panel. (You can edit the value.)
Note that the cursor position is always displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel. 3
Orange Line
Cursor
The chart will move the specified offset value. The chart offset value display section will be displayed in
blue, and Chart Shift will be displayed in Message Display Area 2 of the screen.
Also, the shift amount will be displayed in the display panel.
Chart Shift display Shift amount

(2) Transforming the datum
You can convert the geodetic datum of a position or the own ships position to the WGS-84 system.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(8) Datum Transformation] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(8) Datum Transformation] in that order.
The Change Datum panel opens.
2) Enter the reference position using one of the following methods:

Enter the position into the value entry boxes.
Left-click the [Ship Position] button to enter the own ships position.
Left-click the [by Cursor] button and left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the position is entered.
3) Left-click the Geodetic Datum From drop-down button, then select the geodetic system of the conver-
sion source from the list.
The geodetic system will be converted, and the position after shifting and offset value will be displayed.
4) After confirming the position after shifting and the offset displayed in the [Chart Shift] box, left-click the
[OK] button to close the panel.
The chart will move by the offset value, and the offset display section of the chart will be displayed in
blue. Chart will be displayed in the message display area of the screen.

Note:
Chart position for the WGS84 system

Y
X
Chart position for the local
geodetic system 3
X, Y: Offset value for WGS-84

When X and Y are contained in the chart data, the geodetic system is converted automatically, and
the chart is displayed inclusive of these offset values. At this time, the chart position for the primary
geodetic system is displayed in blue on the display panel, and Chart Shift To WGS-84 is displayed in
the screen message area.
In such a case, the geodetic system conversion function will be deactivated even if offset values are set
in the Change Datum panel and the [OK] button is left-clicked, and the message The Datum is
already WGS-84 will be displayed on the panel.

3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only)
After power ON, the chart on which your ship exists is automatically called up so that the voyage can be monitored
at all times. When you want to display other chart, perform the following operation.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The Select Chart panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
By pressing the [HOME] button on the display, you can display the chart on which your ship is.

3.10 Displaying a User Chart
You can display a user chart you have made.
Note:
Before use of this function, you need to make a user chart beforehand. See chapter 5 Chart Editing.

3
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.
2) Left-click the user chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The Open Chart File panel closes and the selected user chart is displayed on the screen.
To clear the displayed user chart from the screen:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(3) Unselect User Charts] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(3) Unselect User Charts] in that order.
Then, the user chart is cleared from the screen.

3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart
You can merge the S-57 updating charts with the original charts. Whether you merge the updating chart here in
Navigation & Planning screen or you merge it when importing with the Chart Portfolio is selectable in the Chart
Portfolio setting. (For Chart Portfolio operation, see 8.7.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update.
1) Be sure that the SENC information level is set to [STANDARD] or [OTHER] and not [BASE].
[STANDARD] or [OTHER] is selected.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
The Accept Updates panel opens.
3) Left-click one of the S-57 updating charts in the table.

If you want to display and check the updating objects, left-click the [Show] button.
Then, the S-57 updating chart will be displayed on the chart.
The objects of the updating chart will be superimposed on the original chart and show in red.
Accept updating
objects by left-clicking
the [OK] button.
Updating objects will be dis- The updating objects are merged with the
played in red. original chart and its color is changed from
red to normal one.
4) Left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the updating objects are merged with the original chart.

3.12 User-Marking/Highlighting
You can input the following marks on the chart.
EVENT mark: During voyage, you can put an event mark at the ship position.
Information mark: You can put an information mark at any position.
Tidal stream mark: You can put an tidal mark at any position. The speed (knot) and bearing can be input.
Highlighting: You can put a highlight area at any position for your reference.
Information mark
3
Highlighing
Own ship
i
EVENT mark
5.0
30.0
Knot
Bearing
Tidal Stream mark
3.12.1 Marking the Event Mark (EVENT)

(1) Event marking using the display panel
During voyage, you can put an EVENT mark ( ) at the point where your ship is located.
Left-click the [EVENT] button.
- To check the information on the EVENT mark, see 3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects.
(2) Event marking using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event-Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event-Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel opens.

2) In the Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time.
Enter comment on the event.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the EVENT mark.
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the EVENT mark ( ) is put on the chart.
Position of the EVENT mark
EVENT mark
(3) How to delete the EVENT mark

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event-Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event-Mark] in that order.
The Delete Event Mark panel opens.
2) Left-click the EVENT No. you want and then left-click the [Delete] button.
The panel closes and the selected EVENT mark is deleted from the chart.

3.12.2 Marking the Information Mark
You can put an information mark ( ) at any point on the chart.

The Location/Attributes - Information panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the cursor.
3
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Information panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter the comment on the information mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the information mark.
To edit the information mark position, left-click the [Edit] button.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the information mark ( ) is put on the screen.
Information mark
Position of the information mark
For viewing the information on the information mark or editing/deleting the information mark, see 3.13
Reading Out Information on the Objects.

3.12.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark
You can put a tidal stream mark at any point on the chart. The tidal stream mark has the bearing and stream speed
in knot. You can edit them after putting the tidal stream mark on the chart.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel, perform the following editing operation.
Set/Drift setting
- Left-click either Actual or Predicted.
- Enter the bearing and speed.
Enter comment on the tidal stream mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the tidal stream mark.
To edit the tidal mark position, left-click the [Edit] button.
You will see that the tidal stream mark is put on the screen.
Position of the tidal stream mark
5.0
30.0
Knot
Bearing
Tidal Stream mark
For viewing the information on the tidal stream mark or editing/deleting the tidal stream mark, see 3.13

3.12.4 Highlighting
You can use a polygon to highlight any parts of a chart. This function can be used when you wish to make notations.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Highlight panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the part to be highlighted. Then, click on the coordinates of a point
which will be the starting point of the area to be highlighted.
3
3) In the Location/Attributes - Highlight panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter comment on the highlighting.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the highlighting.
To edit the highlighting position, left-click the [Edit] button.
You will see that the highlighting is put on the screen.
Highlighting
Top of a highlighted area
For viewing the information on the highlighting or editing/deleting the highlighting, see 3.13 Reading
Out Information on the Objects.
Note:
When entering data that requires detailed editing, use the user chart (See chapter 5 Chart Editing).

3.12.5 Inputting Clearing Lines
Clearing lines can be displayed by using EBL/VRM.
1) When EBL/VRM is operating (see 3.17 Operating EBL/VRM), the start point and end point of clearing
lines should be determined from the base point and intersecting points of EBL/VRM, and then the right
button on the track ball should be clicked.
2) Place the cursor over [Create Clearing Line] in the shortcut menu to display Not Less Than and Not
More Than, and left-click on either of them.
3) Clearing lines from the center of ERL/VRM to their intersecting points will be drawn.
NLT: Not Less Than

NLT116 means Not less than 116.
NMT: Not More Than
NMT152 means Not more than 152.
For viewing the information on clearing lines or editing/deleting clearing lines, see 3.13 Reading Out
Information on the Objects.

3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects
Each of the objects on the chart has its own information (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land, river). For
example, if an object is a lighthouse, information such as lighting color and frequency can be readout. If the object
is depth contour, the water depth can be read out. The chart will be the original chart (S-57/C-MAP/ARCS). Also,
you can read out the information on the marks such as the EVENT mark you entered.
(1) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the operation panel ([INFO]) 3
Press the [INFO] key. INFO
The cross cursor will change to the box cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball to point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click.
The Information panel opens displaying information about the selected object.
[Example display]
(2) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the shortcut menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.
To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example:When [(9) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] is selected]

Displaying additional chart information:
When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be displayed in the
combo box under the Information panel.
1) Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show] button.
2) The additional information will be displayed.
To close the additional information, left-click the [Close] button.

(3) Reading out the event/tidal stream/highlight mark/user data information and clearing line
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the shortcut menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor. 3
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.
To edit the object, left-click the [Edit] button.

The Location/Attributes panel used when inputting the mark, mentioned earlier is opened.
To delete the object, left-click the [Delete] button.
To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example for the EVENT mark:]

3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways
(Multi View/Wide View)
This equipment has multi view and wide view functions. You can divide the chart screen into two sections in which
the same charts or different chart (not different geodetic system) can be displayed in various ways. (Note that the
multi view function is not available for ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3.) Also, with the wide view function, you can see
the additional wide view screen in the display panel area.
Active screen
View 1 Own ship's symbol
View 1 screen
Multi view
screen example
View 2 screen View 1 screen
View 2
View 2 screen
Inactive screen Wide view screen
[Multi View and Wide View]
3.14.1 Multi View Screen

You can display two screens, View 1 and View 2 simultaneously. The active screen (selected screen) has a blue title
bar as shown in the above figure. The other side screen is inactive.
To set the View 1 screen active, for example, left-click the View 1 screen. At this time, off-center will be used to
place the cursor in the center of the screen for that view. If off-center is not desired, move the cursor to the title bar
of the view, then left-click.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] in that order.
2) Left-click one of the submenus to select the multi view type.
Then, the selected multi view is displayed.
- Single View
- Top Bottom
- Right Left
- Right Top View
- Left Top View
- Right Bottom View
- Left Bottom View

(Single view) (Top Bottom view) (Right Left view) (Right Top view)
View 1 View 2
View 2 View 1
View 1
View 2
(Left Top view) (Right Bottom view) (Left Bottom view)
View 2
View 1 View 1
3
View 1
View 2 View 2
To return to the single view:

Left-click [(1) Single View]. Then, the screen will return to the normal screen (single view).
Note:
In View 2, the radar overlay, route, ARPA/AIS target ship symbols, own ships track, user chart objects
and manual updates are not displayed.
3.14.2 Selecting an Area

A selected area will be displayed as the Right Top view.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
The cursor becomes the lens cursor.
2) If previous view mode was single view, the area selected with the lens cursor will be displayed as the Right
Top view. If previous view mode was multi view, selected area in view1 is displayed in view2.

3.14.3 Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can display the wide view screen on the display panel. The buttons that were the wide view screen section
move to the upper part of the screen.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
The wide view screen appears in the display panel area.
In the wide view screen, the currently displayed area is surrounded by the blue line.
If the same chart is displayed in multi view, the view 1 chart area will be surrounded by a blue line and the
view 2 chart area will be surrounded with a red line.
[Close] button
Wide view
Area currently displayed (Blue line)
To close the wide view screen:
Left-click on the [Close] button on the left top corner of the screen.
Then, the wide view screen disappears from the display panel and the buttons return to the original place.

3.15 Using the Analog Meter
During voyage, you can display the analog meter on the display panel. You can see the course, heading, course to
steer, set, etc. on the analog meter. Also, you can select the items to be displayed on the analog meter.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(4) Analog Meter] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu 3
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(4) Analog Meter] in that order.
The following analog meter is displayed.
On the analog meter panel, items with the arrow mark (e.g. COURSE) are represented by the indicators of
the analog meter. The color of the item and that of the indicator match each other. So, you can easily
identify each indicator from the color.
The white mark corresponds to the white pointer.
(Color matches each other in all items.)
Course and speed (The vector of the vessels motion over the
ground and the course of the route selected.)
Ships heading
Log speed (speed through water)
Course to Steer
Note: It is displayed during Automatic Sailing only.
Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG and

HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG and HDG
vectors
SET (Light blue arrow)

HEADING (Gray arrow)
COURSE (White arrow)
CTS (Red triangle)
[Close] button
To close the analog meter:

Turns ON/OFF the arrow
Left-click the [Close] button on the analog meter.
marks on the panel.
Changing the items to be displayed on the analog meter:

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Display Panel] in
that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart
Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Display Panel] in
that order.
Then, the Analog Display Option panel opens.
2) Left-click to turn ON/OFF the items you want to display and left-
click the [OK] button.
3.16 Own Ships Setting ([Ship] - [Option])
The following settings on own ship are explained here.
Primary position (of own ship) and secondary position settings
Vector display and heading line at the primary position
Danger detection vector and sector
Primary position track and time label, etc.
Each item is shown in the following figure.
COG vector
Sector (up to 360 degrees)

Heading line
Own ship (Primary position)

Time labels
Every 10 to 60 min.
HDG vector
Danger detection vector

Tracking dots
Own ship (Secondary position) Every 1 to 60 sec. Tracking spot
Max. 60 min. Every 10 sec. to 10 min.
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)
[Own Ships Setting Items]

3.16.1 Ships Shape
You can select your ships shape, either symbol (a) or outline (b). Either (a) or (b) will be displayed at the primary
position on the chart.
Shape of the outline (b) depends on the scale of the chart and the width and length of the ship setting at installation.
Even though you choose the outline (b), the symbol (a) will be displayed unless enlarged chart is selected. When the
chart is enlarged, the outline (b) will be displayed.
Width of ship according to

scale
3
Length of ship according
to scale
(a) (b)
[Your Ship Symbol]

Sselect [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.
The Own Ship Option panel is displayed.
2) In the Ships Shape panel, left-click either Symbol (a) or Out Line (b).
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

3.16.2 Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary Position
The COG vector (vector of the vessels motion over the ground), HDG vector (vector of the vessels motion through
the water) and heading line can be displayed for your ships symbol.
The COG and HDG vectors can be displayed at lengths proportional to the ships current speed in minutes. For
example, if the vector length is set as 10 minutes, a vector with 1-minute notches (non-tilled), and 6-minute notches
(tilled) is displayed.
The tip of the vector is the expected position in 10 minutes assuming that the ship sails at the current speed.
COG vector
Expected position after
10 min., for example
Vector length
Heading line
HDG vector
Vector time mark
[Vector Display and Heading line]

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.
2) Set each item on the Vector panel.
To display the heading line ON/OFF, left-click the Display Head Line on the Track/Head Line panel.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the Own Ship Option panel. Then, the panel will close.
Turns ON/OFF the COG vector display.
Turns ON/OFF the HDG vector display.
COG/HDG vector time until the ship

reaches the expected position. (Max. 60
min.)
Vector Time Mark ON/OFF
Heading line ON/OFF

3.16.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector
You can set the danger detection vector and sector for your safety. The danger detection vector can be set the
monitoring area of the cross line of the safety contour and the danger area etc. While, the sector can be set to
monitor dangerous objects around your ship. The danger detection vector is shown in the rectangular shape and the
tip of the vector is the expected time assuming that the ship sails at the current speed. The sector and its radius can
be set as required.
COG vector Sector

Sector radius in nm
3
Danger detection vector
Angle
HDG vector
Danger detection vector in minute

[Danger Detection Vector and Sector]
2) Left-click each item on the Alarm Detection panel and then click the [Set Alarm Limit] button.
The Alarm List Option panel opens.
Sector display ON/OFF
Danger detection vector display ON/OFF
3) Left-click the Vector and Sector and enter the value

Vector: Danger detection vector in minute
Sector: Sector radius in nm and the angle (up to 360 degrees)
4) Left-click the [OK] button on the Alarm List Option panel, and then the [OK] button on the Own Ship
Option panel to close all panels.

3.16.4 Track and Time Label Display
The primary position of own ship is memorized to hard disk every second, and up to 24 hours of information is
displayed on the chart as the track as follows:
Own ship (Primary position) Time labels

Every 10 to 60 min.
Tracking dots Tracking spot

Every 1 to 60 sec. Every 10 sec. to 10 min.
Max. 60 min.
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)
[Primary Position Track and Time Label]

2) In the "Track/Head Line" panel, left-click Display Tracking and Display Time Label to select them.
3) Select one of seven colors you want from the drop-down list. Also enter values while reading the complete
sentence written on the panel.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the Own Ship Option panel to close it.
Color of ships track (Red, Green, Blue, Ma-

genta, Orange, Brown, or Black)
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, or 24 hour
0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.
1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 sec.
10, 20, or 30 sec., or 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 min.
10, 30, 60 min.

3.16.5 Beam Bearing Line
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter value to the value entry box.
Beam bearing line

Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.
3
Beam bearing line/OFF Beam bearing line/ON
3) Left-click the [OK] button on the Own Ship Option panel to close it.

3.17 Operating EBL/VRM
There are two ways to draw the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)/VRM (Variable Range Maker) on the chart.
Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] keys and EBL/VRM dials on the operation panel
Using the menu or the shortcut menu (1 step or 2 step operation selectable)
3.17.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel

On the operation panel, two sets of EBL/VRMs can be used for measuring bearing and distance. You can also set
your ships position or any position as the center (base point) of the EBL/VRM.
(1) Displaying and clearing the EBL1/VRM1 marker

If you press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key, the EBL1 or VRM1 marker with your ship as the base point, and the
EBL1/VRM1 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dashed line. Each of these
markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
Distance of VRM1
Information for EBL1/VRM1
Bearing of EBL1
EBL1
Your ship
VRM
Position of crossing point of EBL1/VRM1
To clear the EBL1 marker or VRM1 marker: Position information for cursor
Press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key again.
(2) Displaying and clearing the EBL2/VRM2 marker

If you press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key, the EBL2 or VRM2 marker with your ship as the base point, and the
EBL2/VRM2 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dash dotted line to distin-
guish them from EBL1/VRM1. Each of these markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
To clear the EBL2 marker or VRM2 marker:

Press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key again.
(3) Switching EBL1/VRM1 marker and EBL2/VRM2 marker operations

The following describes how to switch operation when the EBL1 and EBL2, or VRM1 and VRM2 markers
are simultaneously displayed.
For example, lets assume that EBL1 and EBL2 are displayed on the screen, and that EBL2 can be operated by
the EBL dial. In this case, press the [EBL1] key so that the EBL1 can be operated by the EBL dial.

EBL2
EBL EBL
It is possible to operate EBL1. EBL2 appears and it is possible to

operate EBL2.
EBL1 EBL2
EBL
It is possible to operate EBL1.
[Switching of EBL1/VRM1 Marker and EBL2/VRM2 Marker -- Ship-centered EBL/VRM]
These can be moved independently, such as EBL1 and VRM2 or

EBL2 and VRM1.
The intersecting point positions in these cases will be displayed by
combinations of the previously displayed EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/
VRM2.
When EBL and VRM are displayed independently, only their bear-
ing and distance will be displayed.
Notes:
For VRM1 and VRM2, use [VRM1] and [VRM2] key in the same way as for EBL1 and EBL2.
They will be displayed as floating EBL/VRM while operating in free mode. (See the next page.)

(4) Changing the EBL/VRM marker base point
The following example describes how to change the base point for EBL1 from your ships position to another
position.
VRM1, EBL2 and VRM2 are operated in the same way as EBL1.
1) With the EBL1 base point displayed in the own ship position, hold down the [EBL1] key for more than
two seconds. Then, the EBL/VRM cursor appears.
2) Move the EBL/VRM cursor to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position.
(Press [EBL 1] key for more than two seconds, base point of EBL/VRM can change again.)
Hold down for more than 2 sec.
EBL1 Move the EBL cursor to

a destination point.
The EBL cursor appears.
Left-click
EBL
The EBL cursor disappears

and EBL1 is fixed.
[Moving the Base Point -- Floating EBL/VRM]

The following operation should be carried out to set the base point of floating EBL/VRM at the ships center:
1) Make sure that the base point of the displayed EBL1 is not fixed and floating. Hold down the [EBL1] key
for more than 2 seconds.
The base point moves to where the ship is.
Hold down for more than

2 seconds.
EBL1
3
(Floating EBL/VRM) (Ship-centered EBL/VRM)
The EBL cursor appears. The base point is reset at the ship's position.
[Resetting the Base Point at the Ship's Position]

3.17.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Menu
You can draw EBL and VRM on the chart either 1-step method or 2-step (step-by-step) method.
In the 1-step method, EBL and VRM appear at the same time. In the 2-step method, EBL appears and, after fixing
EBL, VRM appears. Also, you can draw ship-centered EBL/VRM or floating EBL/VRM.
3.17.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(0) Option] in that order.
The EBL/VRM panel opens.
2) Left-click either 1 Step or 2 Step and then press the [OK] button to close the panel.
1 Step: Quicker operation (Both EBL and VRM appear on the chart.)
2 Step: Step-by-step operation (First EBL and then VRM)
3.17.2.2 1-step Operation

(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Ship-Centered operation (1-step operation)
1) Select 1 Step option in 3.17.2.1 as mentioned above.
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Ship-Centered] from the shortcut menu.
The EBLl and VRM1 are displayed on the chart.

EBL1
Intersection
Your ship
VRM1
Bearing of EBL1
3
1: EBL1/VRM1 Position of crossing
point of EBL1/VRM1
Distance of VRM1
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and VRM1 and then left-click at the position you want.
Then, the EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed on the chart.
The bearing and distance are displayed on the chart.
To delete the fixed EBL1/VRM1:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] from the short-
cut menu.
Tips: Useful shortcut -- Abort

During EBL/VRM operation, for example, you can cancel the current operation step by the following proce-
dure.
Right-click at any position on the

chart to open the shortcut menu. Rotate the trackball to move Left-click Abort to abort
Abort shortcut menu will open. the cursor on the Abort. the current operation step.

(2) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) floating operation (1-step operation)
1) Select 1 Step option in 3.17.2.1.
2) In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating]
in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu, select [MENU] - [(3)
Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Floating] from the shortcut menu.
The EBL1 and VRM1 appear on the chart at the same time.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the center point at the position you want and left-click there.
4) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL/VRM cursor and then left-click at the position you want.
Then, the EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed on the chart.

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-
Line)] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu, select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor]
- [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that order.
cut menu.
EBL1
VRM1
Center point
Intersection

(3) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Ship-Centered operation (1-step operation)
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in that
order.
order. 3
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Ship-Centered] from the
shortcut menu.
3) Operate in the same manner as for EBL1/VRM1.
The EBL2/VRM2 lines are dash-dotted ones.
The bearing, distance and position are displayed in the same way as for EBL1/VRM1 except for 2.
For EBL2/VRM2

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] in that
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove EBL/VRM] - [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] from the
shortcut menu.

(4) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Floating operation (1-step operation)
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Floating] from the short-
cut menu.

In the normal menu
order.
order.
shortcut menu.

3.17.2.3 2-step Operation
(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Ship-Centered operation (2-step operation)
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Ship-Centered] from the shortcut
3
menu.
The EBL appears on the chart.
EBL1
Your ship
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and then left-click at the bearing you want.
Then, the EBL1 is fixed and VRM1 appears on the chart.
4) Rotate the trackball to move the VRM1 and then left-click at the distance you want.
Now, both EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed at the position you intended.
After fixing, the cursor appears.
EBL1 (fixed)
EBL1 (fixed)
Intersection
Your ship
VRM1 VRM1 (fixed)

In the normal menu
cut menu.

(2) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Floating operation (2-step operation)
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Floating] from the shortcut menu.
The EBL/VRM cursor and EBL1 appear on the chart. (Fig. (a))
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL/VRM cursor and then left-click at the position you want. (Fig. (a))
4) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and then left-click at the bearing you want. (Fig. (b))
Then, the EBL1 is fixed and VRM1 appears on the chart.
5) Rotate the trackball to move the VRM1 and then left-click at the distance you want. (Fig. (c))
Now, both EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed at the position you intended.
(a) (b)
EBL1
Your ship
EBL/VRM cursor
(c) (d)
VRM1 VRM1
Intersection EBL1 (fixed)
After fixing, the cursor appears.

In the normal menu
cut menu.

(3) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Ship-centered operation (2-step operation)
order.
order. 3
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Ship-Centered] from the
shortcut menu.
The EBL2/VRM2 lines are dash-dotted ones.
The bearing, distance and position are shown in the same way as for EBL1/VRM1 except for 2 at the
left upper corner.
For EBL2/VRM2

In the normal menu
order.
order.
shortcut menu.

(4) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Floating operation (2-step operation)
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Floating] from the short-
cut menu.

In the normal menu
order.
order.
shortcut menu.

3.18 Running Fix
In the running fix function, own ship and the position to be fixed are connected with the EBL and VRM. This
connection is kept regardless of the ships movement. So, you can see the EBL and VRM of own ship against the
fixed position at all times.

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(7) Running Fix] in that order. 3
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(7) Running Fix] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Running Fix] from the shortcut menu.
The EBL and VRM are displayed on the chart.
Fixed position
Your ship
* This window disappears after left-clicking.
Bearing
R: Running Fix
Position
Distance
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor and left-click at the position to be fixed.
The bearing and distance are displayed at the fixed place on the chart. As the ship moves, the bearing
and distance displayed change accordingly.
[Relation between your ships position and fixed position when the ship moves]
Fixed position
Your ship
The bearing and distance are displayed here.

To delete the running fix:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(8) Remove Running Fix] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(8) Remove Running Fix] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove Running Fix] from the shortcut menu.

3.19 Maneuver Curve
Maneuver curve display function displays the predictable track when you turn the steering in a certain conditions.
By displaying a maneuver curve that has been drawn safely, the maneuver curve can be used as a target when
turning.
Supplemental line Heading line

Planned route
R
REACH Maneuver curve
WOL (Maneuver Starting Point)

WOL line
Own ship's position
WOL: Steering point

REACH: Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R: Turning radius

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Maneuver Curve] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(6) Maneuver Curve] in that order.
The Maneuver Curve panel opens.
2) Set or select each item.

Reach: Enter the REACH (m).
Turn Mode: Left-click either Radius or Rate.
Radius: Enter the constant turn diameter (nm)
Rate: Enter the constant turn speed (deg/min.)

3) Turn the trackball to determine the start point of the supplemental line.
The position of WOL (steering point) will change depending upon the starting point of the supplemental
line.
If the WOL is behind own ships position, the line color of the WOL will change in red. In this case, you
should change the starting point of the supplemental line.
4) While holding down the [SET CO.] key on the operation panel, set the bearing of the supplemental line
with the joystick.
3
Moving the joystick to the left and right will change the bearing of the supplemental line, and moving the
joystick back and forth will change the radius of the turn mode.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will finally move. The position
of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of the supplemental line.
When the WOL is behind the ship, the WOL line becomes red. When this occurs, correct the bearing or
the position of the supplemental line.
5) Left-click the left button.

The setting will be established.
Note:
Be sure to input the value correctly. If the heading of the maneuver curve is the same as that of
your own ship, the maneuver curve will not be created.
To delete EBL maneuver curve from the chart:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(7) Remove Maneuver Curve] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(7) Remove Maneuver Curve] in that order.

3.20 Cross Bearing
This function displays cross bearings. An angle for calculating the own ships position from the reference point can
be obtained. If a position fixing sensor such as a GPS navigation system has encountered an error causing the own
ships position to be obscure, the own ships position can be obtained by drawing a visually observed fixed targets
bearing on the chart using the cross bearing function.

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(8) Cross Bearing] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(8) Cross Bearing] in that order.
The [Cross Bearing] dialog box opens.
Reference coordinates of the cross bearing line
Reciprocal bearing from the reference point
Bearing from the reference point
Length of the cross bearing line
Selection of bearing display on the chart

(bearing/reciprocal bearing)
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the reference coordinates of the cross bearing line, and left-
click. Alternatively, enter the reference position values in the Latitude and Longitude fields in the [Cross
Bearing] dialog box.
3) Determine the angle of the cross bearing line by turning the EBL dial or entering the reciprocal bearing
viewed from the reference point.
4) Determine the length of the cross bearing line by turning the VRM dial or entering the distance.
5) The drawing of the cross bearing line is determine by left-clicking the [Set] button, and the bearing is
displayed beside the cross bearing line.

6) The cross bearing display is switched by left-clicking the [TRUE] radio button or the [REVERSE] radio
button.
[TRUE] display
[REVERSE] display
7) To display more than one bearing line, repeat steps 1) to 4). Up to ten bearing lines can be displayed at the
same time.
8) To clear all the displayed cross bearings, left-clicking [Clear].
9) To close the dialog box, left-click the [Close] button.

3.21 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode
You can select the motion of your ship on the chart and the azimuth of your ship relative to the chart using the
display panel buttons or the menu. Note that the selectable modes differs depending on the chart type, either S-57/
C-MAP or ARCS.
S-57/C-MAP Ed.2 Chart:

[Possible combination between Motion and Azimuth modes]
Azimuth North Up Course Up Rotation
Motion
True Yes No Yes
Relative Yes Yes Yes
For Rotation mode Free Yes No Yes
Motion drop-down Azimuth drop-down

list button list button
C-MAP Ed.3 Chart:

Motion drop-down Azimuth drop-down
list button list button
ARCS Chart:
Motion drop-down
list button
Explanation of each mode:

For selectable modes, see the above explanation. For example, on the S-57/C-MAP chart, you cannot use the
combination of True/Free mode and Course Up mode. Also, on the ARCS chart, you cannot select Azimuth mode.
Motion mode (True/Relative/Free):

True: Land and other fixed objects are fixed on the display and only own ship moves on the display. When
own ship reaches the predetermined limit, the chart is automatically shifted so that own ship always
remains on the screen.
Relative: Own ship is fixed at the center of the screen and the fixed objects such as land move relatively.
Free: You can freely rotate the chart on the display regardless of the own ships direction of travel. Also, as
the ship goes, it move and will disappear from the screen.
Note:
While in Relative mode, Chart Portfolio cannot be started.

[True Mode] [Relative Mode] [Free Mode]
Fixed Heading line Heading line Fixed Own ship
Heading
line
Own ship
Own ship
Fixed
3
Azimuth mode (North Up/Course Up/Rotation) (S-57/C-MAP Only):
North UP: The chart is displayed so that the chart always orients the north. Fixed objects do not flicker and are
easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of the objects can readily be read out.
Course UP: The chart automatically rotates so that the own ship always faces up on the display.
Rotation: You can rotate the chart by the specified degrees by 1-degree step.
This function is used to point the route heading up, etc.
[North Up Mode] [Course Up Mode] [Rotation Mode] e.g. turned 10 degrees

Heading line Heading line Heading line
Own ship Own ship

Own ship
Mode change caused by the operation:

In the following cases, the motion/azimuth mode will be automatically change from the current mode to another
one.
From True mode to Free mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen.
- When a chart where the ship does not exist is displayed by loading a new chart, including by means of the
[PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
From Relative mode to Free mode:
- When the chart is scrolled.
- When a chart is loaded, including by means of the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
From Free mode to True mode:
- When the [HOME] button is left-clicked.
The rotation made in Free mode is retained if the mode is changed over to True.
Note:
Course Up/Rotation is valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1/5,000,000.

3.21.1 Selecting Motion Mode
You can select Motion mode using the display panel or from the menu.
Note:
While Chart Portfolio is running, Motion mode [Relative] cannot be selected.
(1) Selecting Motion mode using the display panel

Left-click the Motion drop-down list button.
Motion drop-down
list button
2) Select one of items (True, Relative, or Free) by left-clicking it.

For C-MAP Ed.3, Motion mode [Relative] is not available.
(2) Selecting Motion mode from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(9) Motion] - [(1) True], - [(2) Relative], or - [(3) Free] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(9) Motion] - [(1) True], - [(2) Relative], or - [(3) Free] in that order.

3.21.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can select Azimuth mode using the display panel or from the menu.
(1) Selecting Azimuth mode using the display panel

1) Left-click the Azimuth drop-down list button on the display panel.
3
Azimuth drop-down
list button
For Rotation mode

2) Select one of items (North Up, Course Up, or Rotation) by left-clicking it.
Then, the display changes according to your selection.
If you select Rotation, enter its rotational angle in degrees. (0 - 359 degrees).
If True or Free is selected in Motion mode, Course Up cannot be selected.
For C-MAP Ed.3, Azimuth mode [Course Up] is not available.
(2) Selecting Azimuth mode from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(8) Azimuth] - [(1) North Up], - [(2) Course UP], or - [(3) Rotation] in
that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(8) Azimuth] - [(1) North Up], - [(2) Course UP], or - [(3) Rotation] in
that order.
The selected Azimuth mode will be carried out.
3.21.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode

Regardless of Motion mode or Azimuth mode, the currently displayed chart will be fixed and no other charts will be
loaded.
Note:
For C-MAP Ed.3, Chart Fix mode is not available.
(1) Setting Fix mode using the display panel.

Left-click on the [Fix] button. left-click
Gray Red
The button turns red, and the chart display becomes fixed.
2) Left-click on the [Fix] button again to cancel Fix mode.
The button turns gray again.
(2) Setting Fix mode using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order.
The chart display becomes fixed.
2) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order again to cancel Fix mode.

Example use of Chart Fix mode:
If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned off, the wide area chart (JP24NC9G) will
be loaded to replace the chart automatically.
1:30,000 1:250,000
JP44OJBE JP24NC9G
If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned on, it is fixed in the display, and no other
chart will be loaded to replace it.
1:30,000 1:250,000
JP44OJBE JP44OJBE

3.22 My Port List
3.22.1 Adding to My Port List
You can register any position on the chart to the My Port List. After registration, you can directly access to that
position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
The general registration procedure is as follows:
Select a chart and scale.

3
Register the position to the My Port
Shift the position you want approximately
List using the menu.
at the center of the chart.
1) Display the position you want to register to the My Port List.

S-57/C-MAP:
The current position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current scale. So, center the
position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another position, shift the chart area (see 3.6 Shifting the Chart) and zoom in/
out the chart (see 3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)) as required.
ARCS:
The current chart position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current size. So, center the
position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another chart:
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] or - [(2) Select Chart from
all] in that order. For details, see 3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) or 3.8.4 Selecting
Chart from All (ARCS Only).
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Add to my Port List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Add to my Port List] in that order.
The Add to my Port List panel opens.
3) Enter a name you want to register and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Up to 15 characters can be input.
To display the chart registered as My Port List:

Left-click the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel and select the port name you have entered.
(You can also select from the menu.) For details, see 3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button.

3.22.2 Deleting My Port List
You can delete the registered port name from the My Port List as follows:

The Marked Position panel opens, where the registered port names are shown.
2) Left-click the port name you want to delete, and then the [Delete] button.
The selected port name will be deleted.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

3.23 Logbook
You can display the logbook where various voyage information is written. The recorded items and the items shown
on the logbook table are selectable with the logbook option. How to display the logbook and how to select the items
to be saved are explained here.
3.23.1 Displaying the Logbook

The items displayed in the logbook are selectable. For the selection, see the next 3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options.
3
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
The Logbook panel opens. Contents of the logbook are as follows:
(Note that, to see all the contents, scroll the panel.)
No., Date, Time,

Event (kind of alarm, EVENT, Navtex, etc. -- depends on the Logbook Option settings.),
POS1, POS2, Latitude, Longitude, COG, SOG, Heading, Log,
Av. Speed 4h, Av. Speed 24h (average speed recent 4/24 hours),
Voyage Dist. (G ), Voyage Dist. (W) (Voyage distance (Ground)/(Water)),
Chart, Set, Drift, Wind Dir. (direction), Wind Speed, Wave Dir. (direction), Wave Height,
Air Press (pressure), Temp., Water Temp., Engine Rev. (revolution), Comments
Note:
The voyage distance can be reset to 0.0nm. (See 3.27.5 Clear Voyage Distance.)
The voyage distance is available only if the interface with the ship speed sensor is in a log pulse format.
Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system configuration used.

Button Operation (left-click the button):
[Close]: Closes the panel.
[Jump]: Left-click the record data, and then left-click this button. Then, the position of recorded
data is displayed at the center of the screen.
[Print]: The Print panel will open. You can print out the Logbook data after setting the printing
conditions.
(This is only valid when a printer is connected.)
Selected Message: The selected recorded data is printed.
From/To: The data in the date range entered in the input box is printed.
[Input]: You can manually enter the following values and comment as required. When the [OK]
button is left-clicked, the entered values are displayed in the Logbook panel. (The No.
in this panel corresponds to the No. in the Logbook panel.)
[Filter]: The Logbook Option panel opens. You can set the filtering conditions. For logbook
option settings, see the next 3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options.
[Export]: Logbook content is saved as a CSV file. The saved file can be opened with a spread-
sheet program and edited with a personal computer. Select one of the following items in
the Export panel:
Selected Message: The selected record data will be exported.
From/To: Logs saved during the term specified in the entry boxes will be
exported.

The Save As panel will be displayed after you left-click on the [OK] button in the
Export panel. Input the name of the file in the [File name] box, select the folder in
which the file is to be saved, then left-click the [OK] button.
For the data format of the logbook to be exported, see 14.4 Data Formats of Files that
ECDIS can Import/Export.
[Delete Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including Navtex in the Event column, and then left-click this
button to open the Delete panel.
Select either of the following to delete desired log number that includes Navtex.
Selected Message: When the [OK] button is left-clicked, the selected log No. in the
Logbook panel is deleted.
Before: Enter the date/time you want delete the Navtex messages before
the entered date/time.
When the [OK] button is left-clicked, the Navtex messages before
the set date/time are deleted.
[View Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including Navtex in the Event column, and then left-click this
button to open the Letter panel that shows the detailed information on the Navtex
messages.

3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options
You can filter the trigger conditions to record the log data in the logbook. Also, you can filter the trigger conditions
to save the log data which will only be used to display in the Logbook panel explained in 3.23.1 Displaying the
Logbook.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Options] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Options] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
The Logbook Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the option items you want to select in the Logging and View panels, and left-click the [OK]
button.
Note:
Some of the option items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.
Log data is automatically saved according to the settings on the Logging panel. Also, log data will be
saved for displaying in the Logbook panel,
For example, if you left-click and select At Noon. The log data is saved at noon.
Contents of the logbook options are as follows:
At Noon:
Data will be saved at 12:00
(LTM).
Every X minutes:
Data will be saved after set
duration of time.
Route Alarm:
Data will be saved when an
alarm related to ARR, OffCo,
XTE or Route.
Chart Alarm:
Data will be saved when an
alarm related to Chart, SfCnt,
AREA, DNG or ARCS.
When press X:
Data will be saved when the [Event] button is held down.
Autosail/Sensors:
Data will be saved when an alarm related to AUTO, CALL, A/P, POS1, POS2, JUMP, DIFF, GYRO,
LOG, LowSp, Radar or ARPA.
Navtex:
Data will be saved when data from Navtex are received.
Others:
Data will be saved when any other kind of alarm (Setup, HARD or Timer) occurs.
[Navtex Option]:
The Filtering for display panel opens. (See the next page.)

Set the Navtex message filtering conditions by selecting each item on the Station, Month/Year and Mes-
sage panels. Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
The Navtex messages received from the selected Station will be filtered by the condition set by the Month/
Year and Message, and then they will be saved as the Navtex information for displaying on the chart.
The following Navtex mark will be displayed on the chart according to the
Navtex information.
N
3
Station: You can filter the stations by specifying the first letter of the station name. For example, if you
select the letter A, the station name that begins with A will be accepted.
Month/Year: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the month/year.
Message: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the kind of the message. For example, if you
select the letter A, the navigational warnings will be accepted.
Note:
The above Navtex filtering function is provided for message display in Logbook.
The function is not for receiving or recording Navtex messages.
The Navtex messages to be received vary depending on the filter setting of the Navtex receiver.
For details, see the Navtex receiver instruction manual.

3.24 Setting the Chart Options
You can set the various chart options.
3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS] in that order.
The Chart Option panel opens. This panel consists of three panels View Common, View1 and
View2, each of which can be selected by left-clicking the tab.
[View Common panel]
Notes:
You can select CMAP Version setting when the [View Common] panel is selected from the normal
menu but you cannot select a chart when the [View Common] panel is selected from the Table
Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart Editing menu.

(1) Setting the View Common panel
The settings made here apply to View1 and View2 panels for single/multi-view.
1) Select a setting item and enter a value in the value entry box. Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to
close it.
a) Display Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Base/Standard/Other
Selection is the same as when the [BASE], [STANDARD] and [OTHER] buttons on the display
panel are used. For detailed function, see 3.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only).
3
b) Area Boundary (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Plane : Plane boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the dotted lines)
Boundary of the area
Symbolized : Symbolized boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the symbolized line)
Boundary of the area

c) Redraw
Border range: Sets the border range to shift the chart when ship reaches it. (Effective only when
motion True is selected.) Border range can set from 30% to 80%.
Margin (Course up): This function is effective only when the Cource up mode is selected. (See 3.21.2
Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only).) The chart will be turned step-
by-step by the angle set here. Namely, if the Margin is set to 10 degrees, the
chart will be rotated each time the ship turns more than 10 degrees.
[Border range setting]

When your ship is proceeding in the direction of the arrow in the figure
When set border range is 50%

When your ship reaches the border range, the chart automatically shifts as follow:
50%
50%
When set border range is 70%

When your ship reaches the border range, the chart automatically shifts as follow:
70%
70%

d) Chart Symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Paper Chart: Lighthouses and other symbols are shown as indicated on the paper charts.
Simplified: A color-coded symbol is displayed.
Full Light Line: The range of lighthouse light is displayed in circle. When the Full Light Line is set to
ON, the size of the circle changes according to the chart scale. When the chart is
enlarged, the circle becomes large accordingly.
Consider Scale Minimum: When this item is selected, if the chart is reduced exceeding the minimum
scale set in a symbol, the symbol will not be displayed.
The minimum scale of a symbol differs among symbols. Also, note that
3
this item will not work when the chart (symbol) contains no information.
[When Paper Chart is selected]

marks displayed on Electronic Chart
Display indicate that there are rocks or
other dangerous obstacles in the water
area where the vessel is sailing.
Display of marks depends on the set-
tings of Depth Alarm. For the method of
setting Depth Alarm, see e) Depth Alarm
(S-57/C-MAP Only) in 3.24.1 Setting
S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.
[When Simplified is selected]

[Full Light Line setting]
When Full Light Line is OFF
Range of lighthouse light
When Full Light Line is ON
Range of lighthouse light

The size of the circle changes
according to the chart scale.

[Consider Scale Minimum setting]
When the minimum scale of spot depth is 1:40000 and a chart display scale is 1:50000:
When [Consider Scale Minimum] is on
When [Consider Scale Minimum] is off

e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Shallow Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be changed.
Safety Contour: Depth smaller (or shallower) than the preset value are displayed enhanced.
If there is no safety depth line on the chart, a deeper safety depth line than you set is
displayed.
Safety Depth: Spot soundings smaller than the preset value are displayed enhanced.
Deep Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be changed.
Two Colour Depth: Generally, the sea is displayed on charts with sea depths divided into four colors.
However, when Two Colour Depth is selected, the sea depths are displayed in two
colors, with Shallow Contour and Safety Contour displayed as one color, and Safety
Depth and Deep Contour displayed as another color. This feature is used to clearly
indicate and divide the sea into safe areas and dangerous areas where care must be
taken during the voyage, just like Shallow Pattern described earlier.
Shallow Pattern: The Shallow Pattern check mark adds grid lines to shallow sea set at Shallow
Contour and Safety Contour in the four selectable depths. This function is for high-
lighting areas that require special care during the voyage.
[Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour settings]
Shallow Contour
Deep Contour
Land
very shallow water
medium-shallow water
medium-deep water
deep water
Safety Contour

[Two Colour Depth setting]
When Two Colour Depth is OFF (The sea is indicated in four colors.)
Land
Shallow Contour
3
Safety Contour
Safety Depth
Deep Contour
When Two Colour Depth is ON (The sea is indicated in two colors.)

[Shallow Pattern setting]
When Shallow Pattern is ON (Shallow pattern is displayed.)
Shallow Pattern
When Shallow Pattern is OFF (Shallow pattern disappears.)
f) C-MAP Ed.3 Database

ENC or World of C-MAP Ed.3 can be selected for display.
(This feature is available only when C-MAP Ed.3 has been installed.)

(2) Setting the View1 panel
The View1 panel setting is used for the View 1 screen. Namely, this settings apply to the single view screen
(normal screen), or the View 1 screen when you select multi view function to display View 1 and View 2
screens. (For multi view function, see 3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View).)
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF.

Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
[View1 panel]
3
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for the
current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.14.1 Multi View Screen)
Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view

a) Type (Type of chart)
S-57: S-57 chart is displayed. C-MAP Ed.2 can be selected for simultaneous display.
C-MAP Ed.2: C-MAP Ed.2 chart is displayed. S-57 can be selected for simultaneous display.
C-MAP Ed.3: C-MAP Ed.3 chart is displayed.
ARCS: ARCS chart is displayed.
Notes:
ARCS can be selected only if the ARCS chart has already been installed and the ARCS PIN is
correctly inputted when the Navigation & Planning is started.
ARCS and other S-57 or C-MAP cannot be selected at the same time.
b) Text Size (S-57/C-MAP only)
Expands characters. (Limited to the standard size)
Reduces characters.
The character size in the text to which the mark is attached can be changed.
Example: Land reagion
Standard
Reduced Expanded
Reduced Expanded Expanded Reduced
Reduced Expanded Expanded Reduced

Expanded
Reduced

c) Layer (S-57/C-MAP only)
Layers displayed on the chart are listed below. There are [-] layer, [S] layer, and [O] layer.
[-]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [BASE], [STANDARD], or [OTHER] mode.
[S]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [STANDARD] or [OTHER] mode.
[O]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [OTHER] mode.
(For chart object display, see 3.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP only).
Display of each layer listed below can be turned on/off:

3
Layers in S-57/C-MAP Ed.2
[S] objects:
Land reagion, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Bulding,single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark
Navigational system mark
topmarks
light
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station,Trafic, Signal station,Warning
[O] objects:
Quality of data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomary, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate

Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter
Water turbulance, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on lamd
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescure station
[-] objects:
Updated Objects
Layers in C-MAP Ed.3

[S] objects:
Land reagion, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Bulding,single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark
Navigational system mark
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station,Trafic, Signal station,Warning
[O] objects:
Quality of data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomary, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway

Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter
Water turbulance, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational

Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
3
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on lamd
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescure station
[-] objects:
Updated Objects
d) Text (S-57/C-MAP Only)

The texts that will be displayed on the chart. You can turn the display of the following texts ON and OFF.
Text in S-57/C-MAP Ed.2

Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number
National language
Text in C-MAP Ed.3

Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Other text (Name of building so on)
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Geographic names & Generic Text
National language

(3) Setting the View2 panel
The View2 panel setting is used for the View 2 screen. This settings apply to the view 2 screen (the second
screen) which will be displayed when multi view function is used. The view 2 screen will not be displayed if
you use a single screen (normal screen). (For multi view function, see 3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways
(Multi View/Wide View).)

The setting contents are the same as for View 1 panel mentioned earlier.
The setting items are as follows:

Type (Type of chart) Layer Text Text Size
Note:
Use the [View 1] panel to change the chart type from S-57/C-MAP to ARCS.
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for the
current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.14.1 Multi View Screen)
Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view

3.24.2 Setting Other Chart Options
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
The Other Charts Option panel opens.
3

3.24.3 Setting Scales
The Scale panel opens.
2) Left-click the scale you want to turn ON and OFF.
Memo:
The scales selected here will be displayed when you left-click the Scale drop-down list button on the
display panel. Also, when you select the scale from the menu, the scales selected here are shown actively.
While the scales that are not selected here will be displayed inactively.

3.25 Setting the Alarm Options
You can set the various alarm options.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Alarm] - [(0) Option] in that order. 3
The Alarm List Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter the
value.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
a) Limit
Difference between POS1 and POS2:
Displays an alarm on the screen when the POS1 and POS2 have deviated by more than the distance
preset here.
Shift of Primary Position
Displays an alarm on the screen when the movement distance per unit hour (1 second) of the ship is
larger than the distance preset here. This is useful for detecting when something influences your ships
position in such a way that it is displayed at a wrong position on the chart. (This does not apply when
Dead-Reckoning (DR) is used.)
Off Course (OffCo)
Displays an alarm on the screen when your ship has veered off the current course more than the preset angle.

Early Course Change indication (ECC):
WOL arrival alarm (currently not available)
Arrival Last WP (Route):
Displays an alarm on the screen when the time required to arrive at the final destination is reduced to the
amount you have set.
Timer:
An alarm sounds at the time preset here.
Vector:
Danger detection vector in minute
Sector:
Sector radius in nm and the angle width in degree (up to 360 degrees)
*: For vector and angle width, see 3.16.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector.
b) Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can set whether or not to display an alarm on the screen when a symbol on the chart contacts a danger
detection vector by setting each of the items ON and OFF.
Subjects of the items are as follows:
Traffic Separation Zone
Traffic Crossing
Traffic Roundabout
Traffic Precautionary
Two Way Traffic
Deeper Water Route
Recommended Traffic Lane
Inshore Traffic Zone
Fairway
Restricted Area
Caution Area
Offshore Production Area
Military Practice Area
Seaplane Landing Area
Submarine Transit Area
Ice Area
Channel
Fishing Ground
Fishing Prohibited
Pipeline Area
Cable Area
Anchorage Area
Anchorage Prohibited
Spoil Ground
Dumping Ground
Dredge Area
Cargo Transshipment Area
Incineration Area
Specially Protected Area

3.26 Monitoring Dragging Anchor
A circle can be drawn to monitor a dragging anchor at the user-specified position. When the own ship moves and
part of outline of the own ship goes out of this circle, a dragging anchor alarm occurs.
A dragging anchor monitoring circle can be created with the own ship as the center or with the position at which
you left-click on the chart as the center.
Occurrence of dragging anchor alarm 3
The dragging anchor monitoring circle

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor] - [(1) Create Monitoring Circle] in that
order.
The Monitoring Dragging Anchor panel opens.
The central position of the current monitoring circle is displayed on the screen. By default, the heading
forward position is displayed as the center of the circle. Left-clicking on the chart can also set the position
as the center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle.
2) Enter the radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle (10 to 999 m).
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
To re-set a dragging anchor monitoring circle, cancel the monitoring circle beforehand.
How to close the dragging anchor monitoring circle:

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor] - [(2) Clear Monitoring Circle] in that
order.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is cleared.

Dragging anchor alarm:
When the Alarm list panel opens if a dragging anchor alarm occurs, the [Anch] button blinks in red.
[Anch] button: Dragging Anchor.

3.27 Setting the View Options ([View])
You can set various options related to View menu.
3.27.1 Setting Radar Options

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] in that order.
3
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] in that order.
The Radar Option panel opens.
2) After setting the items as required, left-click the [Close] button on the panel to close it.
Notes:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for Radar being used.
The Rader Option panel will not be displayed if an optional radar board is not installed.
IR (Interference Rejection):
This function is used to remove unnecessary signals from other
radars when they are superimposed over the selected radar signal.
Echo Color:
This drop-down list button sets the color of the radar echo. You can
set one of four colors: green, red, yellow and amber.
Gain/Anti Sea Clutter/Anti Rain Clutter/Echo Brill
You can adjust these items using the dials on the operation panel
other than using the dialog box.
Select [Use Keyboard] when you use the dials on the operation
panel.
To Adjust the Radar Image Using the Radar Option Panel:

1) Left-click Use This Dialog to turn ON it.
2) Select value with the scroll bar.
If you left-click and turn ON Auto, automatic setting will
apply.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Radar Option panel.

3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(2) ARPA/AIS] in that order.
The ARPA/AIS Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter the value.
Note:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for ARPA/AIS to be used.
The following items can be set:

For the ARPA and AIS target symbols that will be displayed, see the next page.
a) ARPA Target
Display Vector: Displays the vector for the ARPA/AIS targets.
b) ARPA/AIS Target
Display Track: Displays the track for the ARPA/AIS targets.
Note:
Tracking spots of ARPA/AIS are cleared by changing screen, e.g. Zooming In/Out.

c) AIS Target
High Priority filter for display:
Ring: The AIS targets within the specified distance are displayed.
Sector: The AIS targets within the specified bearing with the heading as the center are displayed.
Heading line Sector area
Guardring area
3
Own ship
120nm
Note:
Maximum number of visible targets are 200. For over 200 targets, at first the targets attributed
danger have priority to show. And secondary the targets without danger are shown the nearest
from own ship one by one.
AIS Danger Status:

CPA (Closest Point of Approach):
Determines that the AIS target is in danger of a collision, if the distance between the own ship and the
AIS target is within the set distance.
TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach):
Determines that the AIS target is in danger of a collision, if the time to reach the own ship is within the
set time.
Note:
Danger targets are able to show within the area inside the dotted line of the above figure even if
the targets are outside of Sector/Guardring area (Radius of the dotted line is 120nm). When a new
danger target detect outside of Sector/Guardring area with still showing maximum targets, the
danger one is shown and the farthest target is lost.
ARPA Identity:
When an AIS target is displayed inside a radius of the set distance of the ARPA target, they are regarded
to represent an identical ship, and the ARPA target disappears from the screen while the AIS target
remains active.
AIS target AIS target remains active.
ARPA target is not

ARPA target
shown.
Set distance
When ARPA Identity is OFF When ARPA Identity is ON

d) External/Internal ARPA
Use Internal ARPA: Internal ARPA is not available currently.
ARPA symbols:
Item Symbol Color
Tracked target Green
Dangerous target Red (blink)
Lost target Green
Initial acquisition mark Green
AIS symbols:
Item Symbol Color
Sleeping target Green
Activated target Green
Green
Selected target
depend on other status
Dangerous target Red (blink)
Lost target Green
COG (valiable length)
ROT (fixed length)
HDG HDG (fixed length)
[Sleeping target] [Activated target]

Conditions for AIS lost targets:
When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target data is considered to be
lost. As shown in the table below, a time period for judging a target as lost varies depending on the class
of receive data and the target status.
[SOLAS-compliant ship] (Class A)
Time until judgment

3
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 3 knots and it is now at anchor or on the berth 18 min
Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the berth 60 sec
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots 60 sec
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots and it is now changing the course 60 sec
Vessel of 14 to 23 knots and it is now changing the course 36 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more 12 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more and it is now changing the course 12 sec
[SOLAS-incompliant ship] (Class B)
Time until judgment

Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 2 knots 18 min
Vessel of 23 knots or more 30 sec
When an AIS target is lost and the target data cannot be received for three minutes, the target and target
data are deleted.

3.27.3 Setting Analog Meter Options
How to set the analog meter options is explained in 3.15 Using the Analog Meter.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Display Panel] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Display Panel] in that order.
You can set the analog meter options.
3.27.4 Setting Logbook Options

How to set the logbook options is explained in 3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Logbook] in that order.
You can set the logbook options
3.27.5 Clear Voyage Distance

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(6) Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(5)Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
The Question panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] button, voyage distance of logbook is cleared.

3.27.6 Setting Date/Time
When your ship is in the same time zone as the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), Time Zone is 0:00, and UTC
and ships local mean time (LMT) are the same.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(7) Date/Time] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(6) Date/Time] in that order.
3
The Date/Time panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter the
value.
The following items can be set:

a) Source of UTC
Set the date/time when MANUAL has been selected in the date/time data source setting. For details, see
7.5.5 Date Data Source Setting.
When the [Set] button is left-clicked, the [Date Time Change] panel opens.
Enter date/month/year/ hour:minite:second numerals in the numeric input box.
b) Initial Time Zone

Set the time difference when MANUAL has been selected in the time zone data source setting. For
details, see 7.5.6 Time Zone Data Source Setting.
You can also use [+30min] and [-30min] button to set time.
(E=+, W=-)
The LMT and the time zone are displayed at the top of the display panel as follows:
LMT Time zone
Note:
When an item other than MANUAL has been set in the date/time data source setting, date/time
setting procedure is not necessary.

3.28 Shifting Own Ship Position
During voyage, you can shift own ships position on the chart using one of the following methods:
Shifts to the position designated by left-clicking the cursor (Cursor)
Shifts by entering the latitude/longitude (Enter Position)
Shifts by entering the offset value (Enter Offset)
Shifted own ship
Actual own ship
When shifting the own ship position with an offset, a reference point mark can be displayed in the position after the
offset. A panel for setting the reference point will be displayed.
Please set the following items:

Position to display the reference point:
The position can be modified by left-clicking the [Edit] button.
Min Scale: Sets the minimum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
Max Scale: Sets the maximum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
Sensor: Selects the type of reference positioning data that is to be displayed for reference point
marks.
DR/GPS/Decca/Loran/Radar/Estimated/Visual/Astronomical/MFD/Transit
Time: Displays the time to be displayed for reference point marks.
Comment: Comments for a reference point mark can be input.
OK: A reference point mark will be displayed in the specified location.
Cancel: No reference point mark will be displayed.

Reference Point Mark
Time moved
Type of reference positioning data
For veiwing the information on reference point mark or editing/deleting reference point mark, see 3.13
3
Do not use the offset function during navigation.

If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position,
the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the real one, and
accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position panel
on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position Shift is
displayed in the message display area. Check these indications, and cancel the
offset function if necessary.

3.28.1 Shifting Using the Cursor
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(1) Cursor] in that order.
The Question panel box opens.

The ship offset cursor appears.
3) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you
want, and then left-click there.
4) The reference point setting panel is displayed.
5) Own ship will shift to that position.
To clear the offset:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in Ship offset cursor
that order.
3.28.2 Shifting by Entering the Position

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(2) Enter Position] in that order.
2) Enter the position and left-click the [OK] button.

4) Own ship will shift to that position.
To clear the offset:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.

3.28.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(3) Enter Offset] in that order.
The Enter Offset panel opens.
3
2) Enter the amount of offset to be shift and left-click the [OK] button.
4) Own ship will shift by the amount of offset entered.
3.29 Canceling the Ship Offset

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
The offset applied to own ship can be canceled. As the offset is canceled, the color of the position display on the
panel changes from sky blue to gray.
3.30 Printing Display

(Only when Connected to a Printer)
By using a printer connected to the workstation, you can print out dialog boxes, such as logbooks, or panels dis-
played on the screen.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) Print Display] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) Print Display] in that order.
The Print panel opens.
2) Set for printing and left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
Printing will starts.

3.31 Saving the Screen
(Only when Connected to Backup Device)
An image of the displayed screen can be saved on the hard disk as a 256-color bit map file.

Press the [OPTION1] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(4) Save Screen] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) Save Screen] in that order.
The image file of the screen will be saved with a file name in the following format:
YYYY MM DD _ HH MM SS.bmp
Year Date Minute

Month Hour Second
(Example) If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6 June 2003, the file name would be
20030606_105015.bmp.
3.32 Displaying the Startup Menu

(Exit the Navigation & Planning)
After the Navigation & Planning is exited, the [Startup menu] will be displayed.
For the [Startup menu], see 3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu.

Select [MENU] and then [(0) Exit].
The Question panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click on the [OK] button.
Navigation & Planning is exited, and the [Startup menu] will be displayed

4
Route
Planning
4-1
In this Chapter, how to make a route is explained in 4.1. In addition, how to create alternate route during voyage is
explained in 4.2.
For selecting the route you have made in this chapter, see 3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP.
To set route options, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.
4.1 Route Planning

You can make a route by using one of the following methods. After you have made a route, you can edit it. Edition
is possible by using either method.
Route planning using the Table Editor
You can make a route by entering each WP value in the WP entry table. Using the [View Sync] button, the
current WP can always be displayed on the chart during editing.
Route planning using the Graphic Editor
You can make a route by graphically drawing each WP on the chart.
Editing Screen and Editing Menu:

When you enter the Table Editing mode or Graphic Editing mode from the normal menu, the editing screen is
displayed.
On the editing screen, editing buttons are displayed. Further, special editing menu is provided and it opens by left-
clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the same way as for normal menu.
The editing button functions are included in this special menu, though some names of buttons are slightly different
from those of menus.
Note:
The special editing menu has the same menus as for normal menu. Explanation of these menus is
omitted in this Chapter.
Route Name and Extention of File:

Route Name: You can enter up to 8 characters. For example: Route-01
(Note) Characters such as . and \ that cannot generally be used in file names cannot be used as
route names.
Extention of File: The extension (3 additional letters) is automatically attached to the route name as follows.
Route-01.rtn
4 Route Planning 4-2

Route shown on the Screen:
WP0
Planned course
WP1
Planned speed
[kt]
Leg
Port side (in red line)

and port side width
Starboard side (in green line) Arrival radius

and starboard side width
WP : Way Point
Note:
For each default value, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.
4-3 4 Route Planning

4.1.1 Setting the Route Options
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(0) Option] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Then, the Route Plan Option panel opens.
Normal Menu
Table Editing Menu
Graphic Editing Menu
2) Select an item, and enter the value in the numeric input box as needed.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
a) Date/Time for monitoring
Select UTC/LMT for arrival time display during route monitoring.
UTC display LMT display

b) Select Route
When the checkbox of Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark), the arrival time is dis-
played at WP during route monitoring.
When Estimated Time of Arrival is off (no checkmark):
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and UTC is selected

for Route Monitoring Time:
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and LMT is selected

for Route Monitoring Time:

c) Default
Set the default of the route to be created during route planning.
Width Prt: Port side width
Width Stb: Starboard side width
Arr Radius: Arrival radius
Speed: Planned ships speed
Sail: RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
Turn Rate: Turn rate
Turn Radius: Turn radius
Time Zone: Time zone
d) Max. Latitude
Waypoints cannot be set in latitudes higher than the set latitude. If a GC leg is higher than the set
latitude, waypoints are added for limiting the GC leg to the maximum latitude.
When the GC leg between WP2 and WP3

exceeds the maximum latitude (60N)
60N
When the maximum latitude is 60 or more, a GC leg exceeding 60 can be input.
WP3 and WP4 are added for limiting the

GC leg to the maximum latitude (60N).
(RL leg between WP3 and WP4)
60N
Waypoints are added at intersections between the GC leg and 60, so a leg exceeding 60 is not input.
e) Check Safety in Editing

During editing the route, safety check is automatically conducted.
(You can manually conduct safety check with the [Safety Check] button or select [MENU] - [(7) Tool]
- [(1) Check Route Safety] in the editing mode menu.)
If an error is detected during the safety check, the route will have to be reset.
(The error part is drown in black color after safety check.)
Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal direction.

4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Table Editing mode
Table editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Table Editor can be edited with the Graphic Editor.
4
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode

Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
The Table Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route.
[Table Editing Screen]
How to open the Table Editing Menu:

Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Table Editing mode will open the special menu for
Table Editor.

How to exit the table editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Table Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from Route
Planning] in that order.
How to print the WP table contents (only when a printer is connected):

Open the route file (WP table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the Table Editing
menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WP Table] in that order.
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor)

(1) Table editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Table Editing mode:
Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 4.1.2.4
(2) Open 4.1.2.5
(3) Import (1) Normal 4.1.2.6
(2) ANTS
(3) 2G ANTS 4.1.2.6
(4) Save 4.1.2.5
(5) Save As 4.1.2.5
(6) Export 4.1.2.7
(7) Print WP Table
(0) Exit from Route Planning
(2) Edit (1) Insert WP 4.1.2.4
(2) Delete WP 4.1.2.4
(3) Divide Leg 4.1.2.4
(4) Set Default
(5) Sort Reversely 4.1.2.4
(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(3) High Resolution Area 3.8.1
(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(6) Remove EBL/VRM (1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(9) ARPA Manual Acq
(1) ARPA Release

Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

(3) Cursor (5) Other Information 3.13
(7) Remove Maneuver Curve 3.19
(8) Cross Bearing 3.20
(0) Option 3.17.2.1
(4) Chart (1) Marking/Highlighting (1) Event-Mark 3.12.1
(3) Tidal Stream Mark
(4) Highlight
3.12.3
3.12.4
4
(5) Delete Event-Mark 3.12.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position 3.6.5
(2) Add to my Port List 3.22.1
(3) My Port List 3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home 3.6.1
(2) Select Chart from all 3.8.4
(3) Change Active Panel 3.8.5
(4) Load Low Resolution 3.8.6
(5) Note and Diagram 3.8.8
(7) Adjust Datum Offset 3.8.10
(8) Datum Transformation 3.8.10
(4) Select S-57 Chart 3.9
(5) User Charts (1) Select User Chart 3.10
(2) Chart Editor 5.3
(6) Manual UpDating 5.4.2
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(3) Rotation 3.21.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.21.1
(2) Relative 3.21.1
(3) Free 3.21.1
(1) Fix View 3.21.3
(0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS 3.24.1
(2) Other Charts 3.24.2
(3) Scale 3.24.3

Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) ARPA/AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS 3.3.9
(5) ALL 3.3.9
(6) ARPA Release All
(8) ALL List 3.3.9
(5) Logbook 3.23.1
(7) Synchronize Chart-View 4.1.2.4
(0) Option (1) Radar 3.27.1
(2) ARPA/AIS 3.27.2
(4) Logbook 3.23.2
(6) Date/Time 3.27.6
(6) Alarm (1) List 3.3.7
(2) History 3.3.7
(0) Option 3.3.5, 3.25
(7) Tool (1) Check Route Safety 4.1.2.4
(2) Check Limits 4.1.2.4
(0) Option

(2) Button functions
Left-click to close the route file and exit the Table Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WP contents. (Only when connected to a printer)

4
Left-click when inserting a new WP.
Left-click when deleting a WP.
Left-click to divide the GC leg.
Left-click when checking the safety of the route. As a result of the checking, warning
dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
(Currently not available)
Left-click when you want to display the WP during editing.
Left-click the drop-down list button to left-click one of the items. The Name column
contents in the editing table change according to the selected item.
Name: You can enter name in the Name column.

WP to WP: WP to WP information is displayed.
Total: WP0 to WPn information is displayed.

4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Table Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a route file
previously made, though the table editing operation is the same.
(1) Making a new route file (Table Editor)
Start
Clear any route if Left-click to select [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Table

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1)
Editing mode.
Table Editor] in that order.
Left-click [New]. Open a new route file.
Select route type. Select [Normal].
Table editing operation
WP0 entry WP0 entry screen

Position (Lat./Lon.)
Left-click the next

WP No.
The following items are automatically

WP1 entry
displayed. Change, if necessary.
Position (Lat./Lon.)
Width (Prt/Stb)
Arr Rad
Speed [kt]
Repeat WP entry until
Sail (RL/GC)
the final WP.
Time Zone
Name
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close] Exit the Table Editing mode.
End

(2) Editing the route file (Table Editor)
Start
Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Table In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1)
Editing mode. Table Editor] in that order.
4
Left-click [Open]. Select a route file you want to edit.
Table editing operation
Edit the WP table.
When you want to change the file

name.
To save without chang- Left-click [Save as]

Left-click [Save] in the menu.
ing the file name.
Enter the new file

name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Table Editing mode.
End

4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart
for Table Editor.
(1) Unloading the selected route before starting

Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any route
on the screen.
You can also unload the selected route by the following menu operation.
In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
[MENU] Button
Then, the Table Editing screen opens.
When you open the Table Editing menu, left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-click
any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.
The Select Route Type panel opens.
2) Left-click Normal, and then left-click the [OK] button.

Now you can enter WPs.

(4) Making a route
1) Left-click the Latitude and Longitude in the position column, and enter the position for WP0.
4
2) Left-click the next WP No. (i.e., WP1).
Then, the same position as the previous WP (i.e. WP0) is automatically set in the position column. Also,
default values are displayed in the other columns.
[Items shown in the table]

Position: Latitude/Longitude
Width Prt: Port side width
Width Stb: Starboard side width
Arr Rad: Arrival radius
Speed [kt]: Ships speed
Sail RL/GC: Sail RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
Time Zone: Time zone
Name: Comment entry column.
The contents of column are changed by left-clicking the
[Name] drop-down list button and then [Name], [WP to
WP], or [Total].
Name: You can enter a comment.
WP to WP: The Name column changes as follows:
Cse: Course to the next WP
Dist: Distance from waypoint to waypoint
TTG: Estimated time required from
waypoint to waypoint
Total: The Name column changes as follows:

Cse: Course to the next WP
Dist: Total distance from waypoint 0 to the
specified waypoint
ETA: Total time from waypoint 0 to the
specified waypoint

[Entry example: The route displayed on the chart corresponds to the list data.]
Entering GC/RL:
To enter a sailing method, you must enter a letter G (for GC) or a letter R (for RL).
Press the [R] key.
Press the [G] key.

(5) Saving the route file
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The Save as Route File panel opens.
4
2) Enter the route file name and comment. Left-click the [OK] button.
3) Left-click the [Close] button.
The Question dialog box will be displayed for confirming the file operation. Left-click Y (Yes) to
close the file. Then, the system exit the Table Editing mode and the list and table editing buttons are
cleared from the screen.
The route file can be edited even after it is saved.
Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal direction.

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu:
Left-click WP No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Insert] button.
Then, the new WP will be added to the WP No. 2, and the WP2 and later WPs will
move by one line downwardly.
Left-click WP No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Delete WP] in that order.
Then, the WP2 is deleted and WP3 and later WPs will move by one line upwardly.
After entering WP(s), left-click the [Safety Check] button to check the safety.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(1) Check Route Safety] in that order.
The Route Waring Check panel opens. Left-click
Select Leg or All Leg and left click the [OK]
button. (When you use Select Leg, you should se-
lect a WP to be checked beforehand.)
The Safety Check function checks not only the dis-
played chart but also all-scale S-57/C-MAP charts that
cross the route to be checked.
If there are no safety issues, the following messages are displayed in the [Route Check]
result display box.
[For Select Leg ]
[For All Leg ]

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:
If the following message is displayed, you should modify the route.

The leg warned is displayed in red in the table. The leg is displayed in red on the chart.
And dangerous objected is emphasized in black color.
4
Shown in red
Shown in red
You can make a route while watching the WP on the chart. For example, above chart is
made with the [View Sync] button left-clicked to set it ON.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(7) Synchronize Chart-View] in that order.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
(Currently not available) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Check Limits] in that order.

1) Left-click the WP with GC leg you want to divide in the WP table.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Divide Leg] in that order.
(When you want to divide the leg between WP2 and WP3, select WP3.)
Then, the Divide Route WP2 to WP3 panel will open.
Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.

Every: Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg type is
changed from GC to RL.)
[Before dividing]
[After dividing]

[Before dividing RL leg]
[After dividing]

[Editing the Course and Distance in the WP to WP display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[WP to WP]. You can edit the values of Cse (Course to the next WP) and Dist (Distance
to the next WP) columns.
Example:
In the following example, the Cse and Dist for the WP1 are modified. As a result, the
position of the WP2 changes according to this modification. Since the position of the
WP2 changes, the Cse and Dist values of WP2 for WP3 also change.
WP2 (After modification)
WP3
WP1
WP2 (Before modification)
[Editing the ETA in the Total display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[Total]. You can edit the value of ETA (Estimated time of arrival to the WP from WP0)
column.
When you edit the WPns ETA, the ETA and ETD of WP0 to WPn-1 are calculated
based on the WPns ETA, and the calculated ETA values are displayed in the table.

[Sort Reversely] In the Table Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.
Before reverse sorting
After reverse sorting

4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for
Table Editor.

on the screen.
In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
- When you open the Table Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-click
any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Route File panel opens.
Note:
You cannot select ANTS in this panel.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen.
Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make a new route file.
When saving without changing the file name:
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Table Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:

1) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
The Save as Route File panel opens. 4
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see (5) Saving
the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files
(1) Importing Normal Route Files

Import normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file name starting
with rtn_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in the file name box after
selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route export, see 4.1.2.7 Exporting
Route Files).
CSV format:
For each WP of a route, a file containing a data row is created. Data are divided by a comma in this file. You
can use Microsoft EXCEL to edit this file.

(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G ANTS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator (JAN-1290,
JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
To convert route files into CSV format, conversion software should be procured separately.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G ANTS] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be opened will
be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import.
- About the format of route files for importing, see 14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/
Export.
Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported already has
a name, save it as rtn_[route name].csv. If you wish to change the file name, follow the naming rules such as
rtn_[route name].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button to save the route file under the name dis-
played in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file
test.rtn, its name will be
set to rtn_test.csv.
- About the format of route files for exporting, see 14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/
Export.
Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Graphic Editing mode
Graphic editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Graphic Editor can be edited with the Table Editor.
4
The file operation using [New], [Open], [Save] and [Close] button is the same as for Table Editor. In the Graphic
Editor, you can make a route graphically by positioning the WPs. The position (latitude/longitude) of the cursor is
shown on the bottom of the display panel for your reference. After you have entered the WP, you can move the WP
with the [Move] button or edit the WP position with the [Info] button. Also, the route you have made can be edited
with the Table Editor.
For positioning the WPs, you can also use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
The Graphic Editing screen as shown beliw will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route graphically.
[Graphic Editing Screen]
How to open the Graphic Editing Menu:

Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Graphic Editing mode will open the special menu for
Graphic Editor.

How to exit the graphic editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from Route
Planning] in that order.
How to print the WP table contents (only when a printer is connected):

Open the route file (WP table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic Editing
menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WP Table] in that order.
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor)

(1) Graphic editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Graphic Editing mode:
Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 4.1.3.4
(2) Open 4.1.3.5
(3) Import (1) Normal 4.1.3.6
(2) ANTS
(3) 2G ANTS 4.1.3.6
(4) Save 4.1.3.5
(5) Save As 4.1.3.5
(6) Export 4.1.3.7
(7) Print WP Table
(0) Exit from Route Planning
(2) Edit (1) Select
(2) Add WP 4.1.3.4
(3) Insert WP 4.1.3.4
(4) Move WP 4.1.3.4
(5) Delete WP 4.1.3.4
(6) Undelete
(7) Use EBL/VRM 4.1.3.4
(8) Use Assistant-Circle 4.1.3.4
(9) Divide Leg 4.1.3.4
(1) Sort Reversely
(0) WP/Leg Information 4.1.3.4
(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3

Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

(3) Cursor (9) ARPA Manual Acq
(1) ARPA Release
(7) Remove Maneuver Curve
(8) Cross Bearing
3.19
3.20
4
(0) Option 3.17.2.1
(3) My Port List 3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home 3.6.1
(2) Chart Editor
(6) Manual UpDating
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(3) Rotation 3.21.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.21.1
(2) Relative 3.21.1
(3) Free 3.21.1
(1) Fix View 3.21.3

Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

(4) Chart (4) Save Screen 3.31
(3) Scale 3.24.3
(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) ARPA/AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS 3.3.9
(5) ALL 3.3.9
(8) ALL List 3.3.9
(5) Logbook 3.23.1
(2) ARPA/AIS 3.27.2
(4) Logbook 3.23.2
(6) Alarm (1) List 3.3.7
(2) History 3.3.7
(0) Option 3.3.5, 3.25
(7) Tool (1) Check Route Safety
(2) Calculate Distance to Run 3.4.3
(0) Option

Shortcut Menus
Right-clicking when editing a graphic will display a shortcut menu. One of the menus below will be
displayed, depending on the operation state when right clicking.
4
Same button operation:
[Insert]
Divide GC leg
Selecting a leg
Same button operation:

[Add]
[Move]
[Delete]
Selecting a waypoint
Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.
Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way

point, and enter an object in that position.
Entering, moving and adding a route

Left-click to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WP contents. (Only when connected to a printer)
Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting the WP or leg.
Left-click when adding a WP to the WP0 or the to the last WP.
Left-click when inserting a WP in the course of the route.
Left-click when moving a WP.
Left-click when deleting a WP.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected WP or leg.

4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Graphic Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a route file
previously made, though the graphic editing operation is the same.
The file opening and saving operation is the same as when using the Table Editor.
(1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)
Start
: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
4
Clear any route if Left-click to select [UNLOAD].
displayed.
Enter the Graphic

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2)
Editing mode.
Graphic Editor] in that order.
Left-click [New]. Open a new route file.
Select route type. Select [Normal].
Graphic editing operation
WP0 entry
(using the cursor)
Next WP entry
(using the cursor)
Repeat WP entry until

the final WP.
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End

(2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)
Start : The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Graphic In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2)
Editing mode. Graphic Editor] in that order.
Left-click [Open]. Select a route file you want to edit.
Graphic editing operation
Edit the WP.
When you want to change the file

name.
To save without chang- Left-click [Save as]

Left-click [Save] ing the file name. in the menu.
Enter the new file

name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End

4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)
This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation Flow-
chart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

on the screen.
In the normal menu
4
(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode
[MENU] Button
When you open the Graphic Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-
click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Graphic Editing menu
The Select Route Type panel opens.
2) Left-click either Normal, and then the [OK] button.

Now you can enter WPs.
How to save the route:

The route file saving operation is exactly the same as for Table Editor.
See (5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).

(4) Making a route
Making a route using buttons on the screen:
The following shows the way how to make a route using the buttons on the screens. (You can mix the EBL/
VRM operation with this button operation. See 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.)
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
Note:
If [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is on (with a checkmark), operation using EBL/VRM is to be performed.
If [(8) Use Assistant Circle] is on, operation using supplemental lines is to be performed. To turn
on/off each item, select the menu. Operation using EBL/VRM and operation using supplemental
lines cannot be turned on at the same time.
While [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is on, turning on [(8) Use Assistant Circle] turns on operation using
supplemental lines. Conversely, while [(8) Use Assistant Circle] is on, turning on [(7) Use EBL/
VRM] turns on operation using EBL/VRM.

1) Entering WPs:
Left-click at the WP (WP0) position and rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the next WP (WP1).
Then, left-click there.
[WP0 fixing/WP0 to WP1] [WP1 fixing]
[WP1 to WP2] [WP2 fixing]

How to shift the chart during entering WPs:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button down, and then move the cursor to scroll the chart while
entering WPs.
2) Terminating WP entry:
Left-click the [Select] button to terminate WP entry. (You can also terminate the operation by selecting
[Abort] in the shortcut menu after right-clicking.)
[Left-clicking [Select] to stop entry] [The route you have entered]
Note:
If a waypoint is located in a position other than an active chart when using ARCS and if another panel
exists at that position, then the panel display will change automatically.
Creating routes using EBL/VRM:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
The EBL/VRM intersection becomes an entering position instead of a cursor.
Entering position
Line drawn from

the previous WP
First, left-click on the center of EBL/ Then, decide where the EBL/VRM
VRM. intersection will be and left-click on it.

Creating routes using supplemental lines:
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(8) Use Assistant Circle] in that order.
WP input using a supplemental line is enabled.
1) WP0 input
Move the cursor to an arbitrary position, and left-click. A supplemental line from the own ships position
will be displayed. Move the trackball to move the intersection between the circles radius and supplemen-
tal line to WP0, and left-click.
4
Cursor Supplemental line
Supplemental line WP0 WP0
This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

2) Specify the center of the circle, and left-click.
WP0
Supplemental line
3) Move the trackball to specify the contact with the circles radius, and left-click. The intersection between
the circle and supplemental line will be entered as a WP.
Supplemental line WP1

WP0

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu:
Deleting the WP:

1) Left-click a WP you want to delete. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select]
button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. Then, the selected WP is deleted.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete WP] in that order.
4
[Select WP3.] [WP3 is deleted.]
Adding a WP to the WP0 or to the last WP:

1) Left-click the WP0 or the last WP. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select]
2) Left-click the [Add] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional
WP. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WP.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Add WP] in that order.
3) Left-click the [Select] button to terminate the adding operation.
[Select WP2 (the last WP).] [WP3 is added.]

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:
Moving a WP (other than WP0 and the last WP):

1) Left-click a WP you want to move. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select]
2) Left-click the [Move] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving the
WP. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WP.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move WP] in that order.
[Select WP2.] [Move WP2.] [WP2 is moved.]
Tips!
Left-click the WP you want to move, and then, left-click it again. [Move] mode will be activated.

Inserting a new WP between WPs:

1) Left-click the leg you want to insert a new WP there. (If you cannot select the leg, left-
click the [Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Insert] button and rotate the trackball to insert a new WP. Then, left-
click the cursor to fix the WP. A new WP is inserted and the number of the later WPs is
increased by 1.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert WP] in that order. 4
[Select the leg.] [Make a new WP.] [New WP is inserted as WP2.]
Tips!
Left-click the leg where you want to insert a WP, and then, left-click it again. [Insert] mode will be
activated.

Designating coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:

Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of left-clicking
on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding route.
Designating coordinates by entering position

1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving, insert-
ing and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor type on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel is closed and the position is designated.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance

ing and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor type on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Bearing/Distance panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
When entering the second way point of a route, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous way point. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that do not
require relative positions, such as the first way point of route.

Displaying/Modifying information of WP or leg:

1) Left-click a WP or leg you want to know about it. (If you cannot select the WP or leg,
left-click the [Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Info] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) WP/Leg Information] in that order.
When WP is selected, [Edit Way Point No.xx] panel opens, while [Edit leg x to x+1]
panel opens when Leg is selected.
Enter the value if you want to change. You can enter a name for the WP. If you want to
4
return each value to the default value, left-click the [Default] button. (The default
value is set in the Route Plan Option panel. See 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.)
After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
[Information for WP2.]
[Information for Leg.]

[Calculate Distance to Run]

You can calculate the distance between WPs or between own ship and a WP with the
calculator (Calculating Distance panel).
1) In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Calculate Distance to Run] in the order.
Then, the Calculating Distance panel opens.
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] panel, and select [Way Point], [Picked
Point], or [Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or [Own Ship], select the WP
number you want from the WP No. drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point],
specify coordinates by left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] panel, and select [Way Point] or [Picked
Point]. If you have selected [Way Point], select the WP number you want from the WP
No. drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-
clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated, and the
calculation result is displayed in the [Distance] box. Left-click the [Close] button.
[Select WP/Own Ship.]
[Select WP No.] [Resultant]

[Divide GC Leg]
1) Left-click the GC leg you want to divide.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Divide Leg] in that order.
Then, the Divide Route WPn-1 to WPn will open.
- Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.

- Every: Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg type is
changed from GC to RL.)
[Before dividing]
[After dividing]

[Before dividing RL leg]
[After dividing]

4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart
for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

on the screen.
In the normal menu
4
(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode
- When you open the Graphic Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
The Open Route File panel opens.
Note:
You cannot select ANTS in this panel.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make
a new route file.

When saving without changing the file name:
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:

2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files
(1) Importing Normal Route Files

Import CSV format normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file name starting
with rtn_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in the file name box after
selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route export, see 4.1.3.7 Exporting
Route Files).

(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G ANTS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator (JAN-1290,
JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G ANTS] in that order
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be opened will
be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Press the [OK] button to start file import.
Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported already has
a name, save it as rtn_[route name].csv. If you wish to change the file name, follow the naming rules such as
rtn_[route name].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button to save the route file under the name dis-
played in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file
test.rtn, its name will be
set to rtn_test.csv.
Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials
The following shows the way how to make a route using the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel. (You
can mix the EBL/VRM operation with the button operation on the screen mentioned earlier.)
Note:
Before starting, be sure that [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON.
If not,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Use EBL/VRM] in that order to set it ON.
Be sure that the check mark is attached.
The EBL cursor is displayed on the screen. (The cursor type changes when [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON.)
1) Press the [EBL1], [EBL2], [VRM1], or [VRM2] key on the operation panel.
2) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
Left-click
Line drawn from own ship

3) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the planned WP0, and left-click there.
WP0
Left-click
4) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
(A line will be drawn through the WP0 and EBL/VRM intersection.)
(This circle is not displayed.) (This circle is not displayed.)
WP0 WP0
Left-click

5) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the next WP (WP1), and left-click there.
(This circle is not displayed.)
WP0
Left-click
WP0
184.0 1000
WP1
Green line
(Starboard side) Red line
(Port side)
6) Follow the steps 4) and 5) until you make the final WP.
How to Edit the Route:

After pressing the [Add], [Move], or [Insert] button on the screen, you can add, move, or insert a WP in the
same EBL/VRM operation as above.

4.2 Creating an Alternate Route
During voyage only, you can create an alternate route while referring to the current route on the screen. The alter-
nate route can be saved as a TEMP file, or by naming a new route name.
The alternate route can be created in the same manner as for making a route using the Graphic Editor. The operation
buttons and the special menu for creating an alternate route are exactly the same as those for the Graphic Editor. So,
the same explanation is omitted here. For omitted information, see 4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Edi-
tor. You can use EBL/VRM in the same way as for the Graphic Editor, though the explanation is omitted here.
Note:
Whether the alternate route is replaced with the original route or not depends the saving methods.
4
- When you left-click the [Save] button and then [Close] button after you made the alternate route, the
original route is replaced with the alternate route. (In this case, the alternate route file name is
TEMP.)
Normally, you will use this method for alternate route.
- When you saved as a new file using the Save as menu, the alternate route is not replaced with the
original route. (For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in 4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route.)
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart

Start
During voyage
(Route is displayed.) Be sure that the current route is displayed on the screen.
Enter Create Alternate In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(4) Create Alternate Route] in
Route mode. that order.
Create the alternate route in the same manner as for the Graphic Editor.
To create an alternative route, you will use the following buttons.
Alternate route
making operation
: For [Info] button, see 4.1.3 Route Planning Using the

Graphic Editor.
Left-click the [Save] The original route is replaced with the alternate route.
button. (If you simply want to save the alternate route file and you are not intending to
replace the route, you should use Save as menu. In this case, the original route
remains as it is. For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in 4.2.2 Cre-
ating Alternate Route.)
Left-click [Close] Exits the Alternate Route Creating mode.
End

4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route
The following two charts show the original route and the altered route, respectively. You will see that, during
creating alternate route, the alternate route is displayed together with the original route.
In this example, the following WPs are altered:
Position of WP1 (Moved)
WP2 (Inserted. So, the number of the later WPs is increased by 1.)
WP6 (Added one WP to the last WP.)
You will learn how to accomplish these alterations.
[Original Route]
[Original Route and Created Alternate Route]
WP6:
Added to the last WP.
Alternate Route
WP1:
Position changed.
WP2:
Inserted.

(1) Alternate Route Editing mode
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(4) Create Alternate Route] in that order.
The Alternate Route Editing screen as shown below will open. (This screen is the same as for Graphic Editor.)
[Alternate Route Editing Screen] [MENU] Button
Opening the Alternate Route Editing Menu: 4

On the display panel in the Alternate Route Editing mode
Left-clicking the [MENU] button.
The special menu for Alternate Route Editor will open. (This menu is the same as for Graphic Editor.)
(2) Creating Alternate Route

The following shows the way how to make an alternate route using the buttons on the screens. (When you use
the EBL/VRM on the operation panel, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
Note:
Alternate routes will be displayed in orange so that the modified section can be differentiated from the
original route.

Moving the WP for Alternate Route:
1) Left-click WP1 to move it. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before starting
operation.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving WP1. Then, left-click
to fix the new WP1 for the alternate route.
[Select WP1.] [Move WP1.]
[Fix the new WP1 for alternate route.]
How to shift the chart during making an alter-

nate route:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button down,
and then move the cursor to scroll the chart while
creating alternate routes.
Moved new WP (WP1).
Alternate route is created. (Orange)

Inserting the WP for Alternate Route:
1) Left-click the leg between WP1 and WP2. (If you cannot select the leg, left-click the [Select] button
before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Insert] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for inserting a new WP. Then, left-
click to fix the WP. New WP2 is inserted and the number of the later WPs is increased by 1.
[Select the leg.] [Left-click the [Insert] button.]
[Position the new WP2.] [New WP is inserted as WP2.]
Inserted WP (WP2).

Adding the WP for Alternate Route:
You can add the WP to the first WP or to the last WP.
1) Left-click the last WP. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before starting opera-
tion.)
2) Left-click the [Add] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional WP. Then, left-click
to fix the WP.
3) Left-click the [Select] button to terminate the adding operation.
[Select the last WP.] [Position the new last WP.]
[WP6 is added as the last WP.]
Added WP (WP6).

Deleting the WP from Alternate Route:
1) Left-click a WP you want to delete. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before
starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. The selected WP will be deleted.
(In the example, WP2 is deleted. You can also delete any WP of the alternate route, such as WP3.)
[Select WP2.] [WP2 is deleted.]

4
You can use this button to display and edit the selected WP and leg.
For details, see [Info] button (page 4-45) of (4) Making a route in 4.1.3.4 Making a
New Route File (Graphic Editing).
[Calculate Distance to Run]:

In the Alternate Route Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Calculate Distance to Run] in that order.
You can automaticaly calculate the distance between WPs, or the distance between own ship and a WP.
For calculation, the Calculating Distance panel is used.
For details, see Calculate Distance to Run (page 4-46) of (4) Making a route in 4.1.3.4 Making a New
Route File (Graphic Editing).

(3) Saving the alternate route file
a) When saving without changing the file name ([Save] button):
Note:
In this case, the file is saved as TEMP, and, when you close the file, the alternate route TEMP
becomes the new route. Namely, the original route is replaced with the alternate route TEMP.

Then, the alternate route file is save as TEMP.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
Then, the original route on the screen is replaced with the alternate route TEMP.
b) When saving as the new file ([(4) Save as] menu):
Note:
In this case, the file is saved as the name you given, and, even when you close the file, the original
route is maintained. Namely, the route is not replaced with the alternate route.
1) In the Alternate Route Editing menu

2) Enter the file name and comment.

4) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.

5
Chart Editing
5-1
This chapter describes how to create user charts and how to manually update charts.
User Charts
User charts can be created and displayed on other charts. User chart information contains various objects (symbols,
lines, areas, and texts). User charts can also be edited and updated. Also, you can merge multiple charts together to
create one user chart.
The following figures show how to use user charts:
Example 1: Example 2: Example 3:
User Chart 2 You can merge as one

User Chart 1 User Chart 2
User Chart 1 user chart.
Chart Chart
Chart
How to Display the User Chart:

To display the user chart, see 3.10 Displaying a User Chart.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in the order.
Manual Update
Objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) can be manually updated. When you save data after manually updating
the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to mariners. Enter the date. You can
check the issue dates of a notice to mariners by using S-57/C-MAP/ARCS information.
Unlike User Chart Edit operation, Manual Update operation links objects directly to the chart. Therefore, the ob-
jects updated manually in the chart cannot be deleted as desired, but can only be hidden from the chart. For the
method of hiding the objects, see 5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation).
When all the following conditions are met, objects updated manually are deleted automatically from the chart.
The chart having objects updated manually has been updated in Chart Portfolio.
3 months or more have passed since the chart was updated manually.
The objects to be deleted are hidden from the chart.
Note:
ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3 charts cannot be updated manually.
The objects updated manually in S-57, S-63 or C-MAP Ed.2 chart can be used commonly in those
charts.
5 Chart Editing 5-2

5.1 Chart Edit Mode
There are two modes in this Chart Edit mode: User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode. Follow the proce-
dure below to start there modes.
User Chart Edit mode:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that order.
A chart edit screen as shown below will be displayed. Use this screen to create/edit a user chart.
[Chart Editing Screen] [MENU] Button
Manual Update mode:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual UpDating] in that order.
A chart edit screen similar to the above will be displayed (buttons at the top and the object entering screen on
the left are slightly different). Use this screen to manually update a chart.
How to open the Chart Edit menu:

In User Chart Edit mode or Manual Update mode
Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel. The following Chart Edit menu will be displayed at
the top of the screen.
5-3 5 Chart Editing

5.2 Menus and Button Functions
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu
Menu items available in Chart Edit mode are shown below. The same menu items are displayed in User Chart Edit
mode and Manual Update mode, but there will be some special menu items for each mode.
Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 5.3.2.1
(2) Open 5.3.2.2
(3) Import (1) CVS file (WGS-84) 5.3.2.4
(2) CVS file (TOKYO) 5.3.2.4
(4) Save 5.3.2.2
(5) Save As 5.3.2.1, 5.3.2.2
(6) Merge 5.3.2.3
(0) Exit from Chart Editor
(2) Edit (1) Select
(2) Add Point 5.5.2
(3) Insert Point 5.5.2
(4) Move 5.5.2
(5) Delete 5.5.2
(6) Undelete 5.5.2
(7) Hide Object 5.5.3
(8) Hide All 5.5.3
(9) Reset Hide 5.5.3
(1) Use EBL/VRM 5.4.2, 5.3.2.1, 5.3.2.2, 5.5.2
(0) Location/Attributes 5.5.2
(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(9) ARPA Manual Acq
(1) ARPA Release
5 Chart Editing 5-4

Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

(3) Cursor (7) Remove Maneuver Curve 3.19
(8) Cross Bearing 3.20
(9) Option 3.17.2.1
(3) My Port List
(4) Home
3.6.4, 3.22.2
3.6.1
5
(2) Chart Editor
(6) Manual UpDating
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(3) Rotation 3.21.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.21.1
(2) Relative 3.21.1
(3) Free 3.21.1
(1) Fix View 3.21.3
(3) Scale 3.24.3
5-5 5 Chart Editing

Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) ARPA/AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS 3.3.9
(5) ALL 3.3.9
(8) ALL List 3.3.9
(5) Logbook 3.23.1
(2) ARPA/AIS 3.27.2
(4) Logbook 3.23.2
(6) Alarm (1) List 3.3.5, 3.3.7
(2) History 3.3.5, 3.3.7
(0) Option 3.25
5 Chart Editing 5-6

Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are displayed by right-clicking when editing charts. Depending on the cursor type when
right-clicking, one of the following menus will be displayed. See 5.5 Entering Objects for details on the
various cursor types.
When the Cursor Type is .
Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.
Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way point,
and enter an object in that position.
When the Cursor Type is .
Buttons for the same operations:

[Add]
[Insert]
[Move]
[Delete]
[Info]
Available when the cursor type is .

5-7 5 Chart Editing
5.2.2 Button Functions
In Chart Edit mode, buttons shown below will be displayed at the top of the screen. The same buttons are used in
User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode, except for one.
[User Chart Edit mode]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.
2 During user chart edit:

Left-click on this button to create a new user chart file.
3 Left-click on this button to open a created user chart (not available during manual update).
4 Left-click on this button to save a created user chart.
5 Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting an object.
6 Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding line to the area.
7 Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.
8 Left-click when moving an object.
9 Left-click when deleting an object.
0 Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
[Manual Update mode]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1 Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.
2 During manual update:

Left-click on this button to manually update the objects.
3 Left-click on this button to open a created user chart (not available during manual update).
4 Left-click on this button to save a created user chart.
5 Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting an object.
6 Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding line to the area.
7 Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.
8 Left-click when moving an object.
9 Left-click when deleting an object.
0 Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
5 Chart Editing 5-8

5.3 Operation Flowchart
This section describes how to edit user charts. For operations in the manual update process, see 5.4 Manual
Update Operation.
Files are opened and saved in different ways when you create a new user chart file and when you open a created file.
Open/Save a file following the procedure described in the Table/Graphic Editor section of chapter 4 Route Planning.
5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit

(1) Creating a new user chart file
Start
5
Start User Chart Edit Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that
mode. order.
Left-click on the Open a new user chart file.

[New] button.
Chart edit operation
Symbols
Lines
Areas See 5.5 Entering Objects .
Texts
Left-click on the Enter a file name and a

[Save] button. comment.
Select a datum in the

Datum Conversion
panel.
Left-click on the
[Close] button. Exit User Chart Edit mode.
End
5-9 5 Chart Editing

(2) Editing a user chart file
Start
Start User Chart Edit Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that
mode. order.
Left-click on the Open user chart file you wish to edit.

[Open] button.
Symbols
Lines
See 5.5 Entering Objects.
Areas
Texts
When overwriting When saving under a new file name
Left-click on the Select [Save as] from

[Save] button. the menu.

Datum Conversion
panel.
Left-click on the
Exit User Chart Edit mode.
[Close] button.
End
5 Chart Editing 5-10

5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Charts
File operations are different when you create a new user chart and when you edit an existing user chart. This section
describes operations in both cases (descriptions follow 5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit). This section also de-
scribes how to merge user charts and how to import user chart files.
Creating a new user chart -> See Section 5.3.2.1.
Editing a user chart -> See Section 5.3.2.2
Merging user charts -> See Section 5.3.2.3
Importing user charts -> See Section 5.3.2.4
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Chart

Follow the procedure below to create a new user chart.
(1) Entering the Chart Editing mode 5

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in the order.
How to exit the user chart editing mode:

Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the User Chart Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Chart Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Chart Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Chart Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-
[Chart Editing Menu]
(2) Opening a new user chart file

1) Left-click the [New] button.
In the User Chart Editing menu
5-11 5 Chart Editing

(3) Entering objects
1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on (checked).
If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart,
[(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).
If using EBL/VRM: Check it.

If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.
2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.

After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user chart file.
(4) Saving a user chart file

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save], [(5) Save as] in that order.
The Save as panel opens.
2) Enter the file name (up to 8 characters) and comment.

3) Left-click the [SAVE] button to close the panel.
Then, the Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.
Select Datum: 5
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
Enter Offset:
You can give offset to the object by entering the offset value (latitude/longitude).
Then, the system exit the User Chart Editing mode.
(5) Exiting the User Chart Editing mode

1) Click the [Close] button to exit the mode.

5.3.2.2 Editing a User Chart
Follow the procedure below to edit an existing user chart.
(1) Starting User Chart mode

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that order.
(2) Opening a user chart file

1) Left-click on the [Open] button.
The Open Chart File panel will be displayed.
2) Select the name of a file you wish to open, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user chart file will be displayed.
(3) Entering objects

1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on (checked).
If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart,
[(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).



When saving a file without changing its file name (using the [Save] button):
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to exit User Chart Edit mode.
When saving a file under a different name (using the [(5) Save As] menu):
1) In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in that order.
The Save as panel will be displayed.
2) Enter a file name (using up to 8 characters) and a comment.

3) Left-click on the [SAVE] button. The panel closes.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.
[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
4) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
5) Left-click on the [Close] button
User Chart Edit mode ends.

5.3.2.3 Merging User Charts
You can merge the user charts as follows:
1) Make a new user chart file or recall a user chart file.

(For example, recall User-01 file.)
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Merge] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.
3) Left-click the file you want to merge with the User-01 file (for example, User-02), and then left-click the
[OK] button to close the panel.
You will see that both objects of the User-01 and User-02 files are shown on the screen.
4) Left-click the [Save] button to save without changing the file name (User-01).
If you want to save as the new file,
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in that order.
Then, the system exit the User Chart Editing mode.
User Chart "USER-02" You can merge as one

User Chart "USER-01" user chart.
User Chart

5.3.2.4 Importing User Charts
User chart files can be imported and used.

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] in that order.
And select a file format to be used at the destination.

- CSV file (WGS-84):
Select this when importing user chart data created with the WGS-84 geodetic system.
- CSV file (TOKYO)
Select this when importing user chart data, created with the Japanese geodetic system, as WGS-84
geodetic system data.
For the data format of the user chart to be imported, see 14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can
5
Import/Export.
The Open panel will be displayed.
2) Select a file you wish to import, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user chart will be displayed on the screen.

5.4 Manual Update Operation
This section describes manual update operations. For operations in the user chart edit process, see 5.3 Operation
Flowchart When manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to
mariners. Enter the date. When certain conditions, such as period that passed since the manual update, are met (see
page 5-2), the entered objects are deleted automatically from the chart.
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update

Start
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual UpDating] in
Start Manual Update
that order.
mode.
Left-click on the
[Start] button.
Left-click on a chart [Example]

you wish to edit.
Symbols
Lines See 5.5 Entering Objects.
Areas
Texts
Left-click on the
[Save] button

Datum Conversion
panel.
Enter the issue date of

a notice to mariners.
Left-click on the
[Close] button. Exit Manual Update mode.
End

5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects
This section describes operations in the manual update procedure (descriptions follow 5.4.1 Flow of Manual
Update).
(1) Starting Manual Update mode

- Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel to open the Chart Edit menu.
The Chart Edit menu will be displayed at the top of the screen. Left-click on the [MENU] button again or
left-click anywhere on the chart to close the menu window.
[Chart Edit menu] 5

(2) Selecting a chart to be edited
1) Left-click on the [Start] button.
The Information panel will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel closes.
2) Left-click on the chart you wish to edit.

A panel showing the chart name will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel closes
(as shown below).
(3) Entering Objects

1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on (checked). If
you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(1) Use EBL/VRM] off (remove a checkmark)
by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.



1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering. Normally, conver-
sion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum]. Normally, conversion
of geodesic systems is not necessary.
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
The Notices to Mariners panel opens.
Enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.

4) Left-click on the [Close] button.
Manual Update mode ends.

Tips! (How to check dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects)
You can use the Object Information panel to check the dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects.
Use the [INFO] button.
In the normal menu
The object information will be retrieved. Entered dates of the objects will be displayed.
Display example

5.5 Entering Objects
This section describes how to enter objects. Basic operations are the same in User Chart Edit and Manual Update
modes. There are four types of objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update
mode use different symbols and lines.
Object types available for user chart edit

[Symbol] Tab [Line] Tab [Area] Tab [Text] Tab

Object types available for manual update
[Symbol] Tab [Line] Tab [Area] Tab [Text] Tab

5.5.1 Selecting Object Types
1) Left-click on a tab for the object type (Symbol, Line, Area, and Text) you wish to select.
2) Select the object you want. See How to Select Objects below.
The selected object may be displayed at the bottom part of the object selection panel.
3) Left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom part of this panel. Then, the cursor changes as follows:
: Object entry cursor
Now you can enter the object you have selected.
How to Select Objects:

You can see the tree structure of the objects on the object
selection panel. For example, to select Light flare, default 1)
symbol of the Barrel buoy, perform as follows. 2)
1) Left-click Buoys twice quickly to open the items be- 3)
hind it.
2) Left-click Barrel buoy twice quickly to open the items
behind it. (Keep continue this operation until - mark
disappears.)
3) Left-click Light flare, default.
The symbol will appear at the bottom of this panel.
To close Buoys, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also select the item by left-clicking + and -

mark:
Left-clicking + will open the behind items.
Left-clicking - will close the behind items.
Before entering the object, always left-click this button.

5.5.2 Entering Objects
See the current cursor position displayed at the bottom when enetering objects.
(1) How to enter symbols

Putting symbols:
1) Select one of the objects on the symbol selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom of
the symbol selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor type is on the chart.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to put the symbol.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the symbol is added on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)
5
First entry Second entry
Last entry
Deleting symbols [Delete]:

1) Left-click the symbol you want to delete with the cursor .
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. (If you want to undelete, select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete].)
Selected symbol
Moving symbols [Move]:

1) Left-click the symbol you want to move with the cursor .
2) Left-click the [Move] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the symbol is moved to the new position.
4) To terminate the operation, left-click the [Select] button or any position on the chart.
(When you left-click the cursor.)

Designating object coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:
Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of left-clicking
on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding symbols, lines, areas and
text.
Designating coordinates by entering position

ing and adding symbols, lines and areas. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor
type on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [OK] button.
The psnel is closed and the position is designated.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance

ing and adding objects, lines, areas and text. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the
cursor type on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Bearing/Distance panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
When entering the second point of a line or area, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous point. When moving objects, the bearing and distance are those from the previous posi-
tion. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that do not require rela-
tive positions, such as symbol and text entering.

Getting Information and Editing Information (Symbol):
1) Left-click the symbol you want to get information.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
You can edit the latitude and longitude by left-clicking the [Edit] button.
You can rotate the symbol by entering rotational angle to Rotation.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
You can enter a comment.
Rotated symbol by 90 degrees
Difference in symbol display between User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode:
Symbols used in the manual update operation will have a mark as shown below. Symbols used in the user chart
edit operation will not have this mark.
[Symbols used in the user chart edit operation] [Symbols used in the manual update operation]
This mark will be added.

Tips!
During editing, you can see what kind of operation is currently possible from the active button.
For example, when you left-click a symbol, the following buttons will be active.
[Select], [Move], [Delete] and [Info]
This means that you can move, delete, or deselect the selected symbol. Also, you can see the information on the
selected symbol with the [Info] button.
Hiding objects (only during the manual update operation)

Saved objects can be hidden from the chart. For details, see 5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual
Update Operation).
Using EBL/VRM on the operation panel:

You can use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel when positioning an object or drawing a line.
When using EBL/VRM, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
When using EBL/VRM, first make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is checked.

(2) How to draw lines
Drawing lines:
1) Select one of the objects on the line selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom of the
line selection panel.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to start drawing a line.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line is extended on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
5
Tips! (Moving the chart)
Click the left trackball button while drawing lines. A hand icon will be shown on the chart. Move the
trackball while holding the left button down to move the chart.
Deleting the line [Delete]:

1) Slowly double left-click the segment of the line you want to delete so that the whole segments of the line
are selected. (Even if the line has a single segment, you need to double left-click it.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete] in that order.
If you want to undelete,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete] in that order.
Tips! (Moving the chart)

When it is difficult to properly click on the segment you wish to delete, press the Chart [Zoom In] button
provided on the right side of the display panel. This will allow you to click on the target segment easily.

Inserting the segment [Insert]:
1) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional segment.
2) Left-click the [Insert] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert Point] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to insert the segment.
4) To terminate insertion, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
Adding the segment (to the end of the line) [Add]:

1) Left-click the last segment of the line.
2) Left-click the [Add] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Add Point] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the new segment is added.
4) To terminate addition, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes

Moving the line [Move]:
1) Slowly double left-click the segment of the line you want to move so that the whole segments of the line
are selected. (Even if the line has a single segment, you need to double left-click it.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to move the line.
Getting information and editing information (Line)

1) Left-click the line you want to get information.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Location/Attributes] in that order.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each segment using the [Edit] button.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the lines attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths)
and line style (3 styles).
- You can enter a comment.

(3) How to draw areas -- Area (Polygon)/(Warning Area)
How to draw the Polygon and Waring Area is the same and the drawing method is similar to that for line. So,
for detailed operation, refer to (2) How to draw lines mentioned earlier.
Drawing area (Polygon)/(Warning Area):

1) Select Polygon or Waring Area on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom
of the selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to draw the area.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line (side) is extended on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. (To abort, right-click the
trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.) Area is created and the cursor changes to .
(Draw sides.) (Left-click [Select].)
Getting information and edit area (line):

1) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each side of the area using the [Edit] button.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3 styles).
- You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color (0%, 25%,
50%, 75%).
- You can enter a comment.
Then, the location/attributes set with the panel apply to the selected area.
(Same color but transparency differs.)

Moving the area [Move]:
2) Left-click the [Move] button, move the cursor to the position you want to move, and left-click the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move] in that order.
Then, the area moves at the designated point.
(Left-click [Move].) (Left-click the cursor.)
5
Deleting the area [Delete]:
2) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete] in that order.
Then, the area is deleted.
If you want to undelete,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete] in that order.
This will be deleted.
Adding a side to the area [Insert]:

1) Left-click the side of the area you want add a side.
2) Left-click the [Insert] button, move the cursor to the position you want, and left-click the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert Point] in that order.
Then, new side is added to the area.
(Left-click the side.) (Left-click [Insert].) (Left-click the cursor.)

(4) How to draw areas -- Circle and Ellipse
1) Select Circle or Ellipse on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom of the
area selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the circle/ellipse.
3) To draw a circle, move the cursor to determine the radius of the circle and left-click the cursor.
To draw a ellipse, move the cursor and left-click the cursor.
4) To terminate drawing, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
5) To change the location/attributes of the circle or ellipse, left-click the object, and then the [Info] button.
(Left-click the cursor.) (Left-click the cursor.)
(Color can be changed using the [Info] button.)
(Same color but trans-

parency differs.)
0%
50%
[Location/Attributes panel for Circle/Ellipse]

You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object using the [Edit] button.
You can edit the radius/axis of the ellipse. (Not for the circle but for the ellipse only)
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3 styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color (0%, 25%,
50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

(5) How to draw areas -- Fans
1) Select Fans on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom of the area selection
panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the fan.
3) Move the cursor to determine the radius and beginning angle of the fan and left-click the cursor.
4) Move the cursor to determine the ending angle and left-click the cursor.
5) To terminate drawing, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
6) To change the location/attributes of the fan, left-click the fan, and then the [Info] button.
Case 1 Case 2
5
[Location/Attributes panel for Fan]

You can edit the radius/axis and angle of the fan.
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3 styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color (0%, 25%,
50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

(6) How to enter text (small/large font)
1) Select Small font or Large font on the text selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom
of the text selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to enter the text.
The word Text is displayed at the left-clicked position.
At the same time, the Location/Attributes panel opens. You can specify the location and select at-
tributes by using this panel.
(When you select Small Font) (When you select Large Font)
[Location/Attributes panel for text]

You can edit the rotational angle of the text.
You can change the color (8 colors) and font size (6 to 72 points).
You can enter the text that will be displayed on the chart and comment.
3) Left-click on the [OK] button to close the panel.

The settings made in the Location/Attributes panel will be applied.
Repeat above steps to enter text at desired locations.

4) Editing entered text
Left-click on the lower left part of the text you wish to edit (Text, for example).
Then, left-click on the [Info] button. The Location/Attributes panel opens. By referring to step 2)
above, edit the position and attributes of the selected text.
Left-click on the [OK] button when you finish editing. The panel closes.
The new settings will be applied to the selected text. 5

5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)
Objects that have been saved in Manual Update mode cannot be edited, but it is possible to hide them from the
chart. This function is available only in Manual Update mode.
(1) Hiding objects

And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the mode and
then restart it).
2) Select an object you wish to hide by left-clicking on it.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Hide Object] in that order.
The selected object disappears from the chart.
4) Repeat the same procedure to hide objects one by one.
(2) Restoring hidden objects

then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(8) Hide All] in that order.
Manually updated objects are all hidden for five seconds, and then they will be displayed again. The
objects that were hidden by the method in 5.5.3-(1) are not displayed.
(3) Re-hide Restored hidden objects

then restart it).
2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Reset Hide] in that order.
Hidden objects are all displayed collectively for five seconds, and then they will be hidden again.

6
Automatic
Sailing
6-1
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and
crossing safety contour.
When this system is connected to an autopilot, a set course is calculated from the scheduled route and ships
position. By outputting the set course to the autopilot, automatic sailing along the scheduled route is possible.
Note:
Automatic sailing is not permitted while charts are displayed in multi view mode.
And exiting Navigation & Planning is not permitted during automatic sailing.
6.1 Automatic Sailing System

6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning)
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WP, you need to perform the following operation for turning the ship.
On the operation panel, press the turn key ([GUARD] + [TURN]).
WP3
Next Leg
WP2
Boundary of WP
Arrival alarm
Cross track distance (XTD)
[Turing Operation]
6 Automatic Sailing 6-2

6.1.2 Route Monitoring and System Alarm
Warning and Alarm
Warning/alarm Condition of warning/ Operating status of Remarks

alarm occurrence automatic sailing
OffCo The difference between Can be continued.
(Off Course) heading and leg bearing
has exceeded the limit.
XTE The ship has gone be- Can be continued.

(Cross Track Error) yond the set route width.
ARR The ship has arrived at the Can be continued.

(Arrival at WP) boundary of the set WP.
GYRO Gyrocompass has got Should be stopped. Change the steering mode of the autopilot to
out of order. Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot
retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
see the instruction manual for autopilot.) 6
POS1 The system position 1 In case of DNV-classed Change the steering mode of the autopilot to
(Primary) has some errors. vessels holding NAUT- Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot
OC notation, use dead- retains the rudder angle set last. (For details,
reckoning for 10 min- see the instruction manual for autopilot.)
utes, and then, stop au-
tomatic sailing.
JUMP The system position Can be continued.

shifts beyond the limit.
Route On the sailing final Stop automatic sailing Change the steering mode of the autopi-
l eg , t h e t i m e h a s after passing through lot to Auto or Hand. Otherwise, the
reached five minutes the final destination. autopilot retains the rudder angle set last.
before the estimated (For details, see the instruction manual
arrival time at the des- for autopilot.)
tination.
LowSp Ship speed through Can be continued.

water has lowered to
less than the set value.
LOG Sensor for speed Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steer-
through water has got ing mode of the autopilot to Auto or
out of order. Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot retains
the rudder angle set last. (For details, see
the instruction manual for autopilot.)
A/P The autopilot has got Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steer-
out of order. ing mode of the autopilot to Auto or
Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot retains
CALL ARR or Route alarm Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the steer-
does not occur for 30 ing mode of the autopilot to Auto or
seconds. Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot retains
6-3 6 Automatic Sailing

6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing
Automatic sailing can be set.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Then, the Autosail Option panel opens.
2) Select items and enter values as required.
a) Tracking Gain
When the ship leaves the route, this setting determines how tightly the course is maintained. There are
three settings: Low, mid and high. An example of the difference between the own ship cross track
distance (XTD) and strength with which the ship returns to the route depending on the tracking gain
setting is shown below. The set heading when deviating to the port side when the ships heading is 0
degrees and the route heading is also 0 degrees is shown.
High
Mid
Low
Note:
The graph above is only one example. The actual values will differ from those in the graph
depending on the constant of the ship and its equipment.

b) Drift Correction
When the ships speed is more than 5 knots, then control will take drift into consideration.
(Not currently available)
Set heading
Drift
Actual route that is expected
c) Dead Band
When dead band is set, a stable course is maintained. Therefore, within the specified range centered
on the route, the set heading is the same as the route heading.
Dead band can be set within the range from 0.001nm to 0.999nm.
Next waypoint 6
Dead band
Set heading
Previous waypoint
(parallel to the route)
d) Autosail
Displays the automatic sailing mode with which the connected autopilot is compatible.
Depending on the specification of the autopilot connected with the ECDIS.
(Only Normal route is currently available)
e) Turn Mode
Displays the turn mode with which the connected autopilot is compatible.
(Only Constant Radius is currently available)
Only Tracking Gain and Dead Band can be set during automatic sailing.

6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation
The following shows the outline of the operation of ECDIS and autopilot during automatic sailing.
ECDIS Autopilot
1) Select the route, and start automatic sailing.

(See the descriptions below for the details of 2) Set the mode of the autopilot to NAVI for
this procedure.) the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA.
(Set it to RC for the autopilot made by
3) Monitor the route. TOKIMEC.)
4) After ending voyage, change the mode of the

5) Select UNLOAD for ROUTE to clear the autopilot from the NAVI to HAND .
route from the screen.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WP during automatic sailing, be
sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the [TURN] key
while keeping the [GUARD] key pressed).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may
result.
During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not.
Note:
For operation of the autopilot, see its instruction manual.

6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WP
To select the route, use the ROUTE on the display panel.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select Route] in that order.
(For details, see 3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP.)
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing

Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the Select WP panel opens.

Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to continue automatic sailing procedure.

Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the turn key ([GUARD] + [TURN]) as follows:
GUARD + TURN
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WP, ARR (arrived at WP) alarm is issued.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel while pressing and holding down the [GUARD] key.
Then, the ship will start to turn.

6.3.3 Terminating the Automatic Sailing
elect [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.
2) Left-click the [OK] button to stop the automatic sailing.

7
Tool Menu/
Maintenance Menu
7-1
The tool menu consists of the following submenus.
File Manager:
The file manager performs file copying operations. For example, you can save the data such as the route file you
have created in the FD. Also, you can copy the FDs files to the systems hard disk.
Chart Portfolio
Charts are imported/updated/deleted.
For chart portfolio operations, see chapter 8 Chart Portfolio.
Chart abbreviations
Descriptions of chart abbreviations are displayed.
Navigation data Graph
A navigation data graph will be displayed. See the separate operation manual for details.
Setting the User Key
Register [USER] key functions.
The maintenance menu consists of the following submenus.

Connectivity
Connectivity between the ECDIS and external sensors will be checked.
Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ships position is entered is set up.
Color Pattern
A test pattern to check the colors displayed for ECDIS is displayed. (Only ARCS)
For Engineers
This submenu is to be used only by our service personnel. It is usually unavailable.
7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu 7-2

7.1 File Manager
Route files and user chart files can be copied from the hard disk to floppy disks and vice versa. Route files and user
chart files can also be deleted.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(1) File Manager] in that order.
Example of Copying: Copying a route file from the hard disk to a floppy disk.
1) Left-click the drop-down button a, then select Route File from the box. When route files are selected,
all files with the extensions .rtn and .rta are displayed.
2) Select Local Disk from box b. The route files saved on the hard disk will be displayed in box c.
3) Left-click the drop-down button d, then select Floppy Disk from the box.
4) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, left-click the file to be copied from box c, then left-click
the [Copy] button (f) to start copying. The selected file will be copied to the floppy disk. When a file is
selected from the box e, and the button g is clicked, then a file on the floppy disk can be copied to the
hard disk.
In order to copy a user chart, User Chart should be selected from the box a. (Files with the extension
.uch are displayed.)
7
a)
b) d)
e)
c)
f)
g)
7-3 7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu

Deleting Files:
1) With files displayed in box c, select a file or left-click the [Select All] button to select all files.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button under box c. The delete confirmation panel will be displayed, so press the
[OK] button to delete the file(s). The same process can be used for box e to delete files in box e with
the [Delete] button under it.
Files that can be Handled with File Manager:

Route files: Normal route files (extension .rtn). (created with chapter 4 Route Planning.)
User charts: User chart files (extension .uch, created with chapter 5 Chart Editing).
Copying and Deleting Files on Backup Devices:

When a backup device is connected to the ECDIS through a network, Backup will be added to boxes c
and d. By selecting Backup, files can be copied and moved to the backup device, or they can be copied
from the backup device.

7.2 Chart Abbreviations
Displays a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations.
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(3) Chart Abbreviation] in that order.
An Information panel with a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations is displayed.

7.3 Setting the User Key
Register [USER] key functions.
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(5) Set User Key] in that order.
The [Select] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Left-click in the function display box. The selectable functions will be listed. Left-click the function that
is to be assigned to the user key.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

7.4 Connection
Communications between the ECDIS and external devices connected to the ECDIS can be checked.
Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(1) Connection] in that order.
The DEVICE DATA DUMP panel will be displayed.
2) From the Device Selection field, select a device connected to the ECDIS.
3) Left-click on the [Start] button. Information entered from the selected external device will be displayed in
the entry data display box in real time. Also, information outputted to the selected external device will be
displayed in the output data display box in real time. Left-click on the [Stop] button to stop information
from being updated. Left-click on the [Clear] button to clear the currently displayed information. If there
is no inputting/outputting of data between the ECDIS and the selected external device, then nothing will
be displayed in the data display box.

7.5 Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ships position is entered is set up.
The external sensor options are as follows:
Primary position and secondary position of own ship
Bearing and speed
Depth
Date data source
Time zone data source
Note:
The options available for each sensor differ depending on the system configuration used.
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position

On this equipment, you can select one of the navigation methods (e.g., GPS navigation, LORAN or dead-reckon-
ing). This is called the primary position (POS1) or system position. A secondary position (POS2) can also be
selected independent of the primary position. This system constantly checks how far the primary and secondary
positions are apart to monitor their mutual positions.

Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(2) Sensors] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Set each item and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Position fixing system for the primary position POS1

(Select from (D)GPS1, (D)GPS2 and DR.)
Select #1.
Position fixing system for the secondary position

POS2 (Select from (none), (D)GPS1,
(D)GPS2, DR and DR-Reset.)
Select #1.
Turning ON/OFF of the secondary position display
(D)GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
(D)GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
DR (normally, not used): The own ships position is estimated on the basis of heading, ship speed, SDME, etc.
none: The secondary position is not used.
DR-Reset: To correct the errors that occur while DR is used, GPS data of POS1 is used as the reference
position of DR. The GPS data obtained when OK in Sensor Connection panel is left-
clicked after DR-Reset is selected will be used as the reference position.
The secondary position symbol is displayed as regardless of the scale. The track information for the past six
minutes is displayed in green. Other information cannot be displayed. The symbol and track can also be turned ON
and OFF.

7.5.2 Bearing Setting
a) Gyro
Select this item if the gyro sensor is used for the heading sensor. Gyro sensors information is used to
determine the heading of the ship. If the sensor being used detects the synchro/step gyro, the initial
value must be entered. After entering the value, left-click the [Set] button to fix it.
GYRO: NMEA out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
NSK: Synchro/step gyro is used for the heading sensor.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the bearing of the ship.
Heading (GYRO, NSK)
Select #1. 7
7.5.3 Speed Setting

a) Log
Select the log sensor. Log sensors information is used to determine the speed of the ship.
NSK: Pulse log is used for the ship speed sensor.
SONAR: NMEA out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the speed of the ship.
The maximum speed that can be set is 100.0 kt.
Ship speed relative to water (LOG, NSK, SONAR)
Select #1.

7.5.4 Depth Setting
Depth (DEPTH)
Select #1.
DEPTH: Echo sounder is used as the depth sensor.

NAVI/F2: Echo sounder is used with NAV interface.
7.5.5 Date Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Date/time setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
Select #1.
GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.

GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.
MANUAL: Date/time setting is made manually. See 3.27.6 Setting Date/Time.
7.5.6 Time Zone Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Time zone setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
Select #1.
GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
MANUAL: Time zone setting is made manually. See 3.27.6 Setting Date/Time.

7.6 Color Test (ARCS Only)
The color test pattern for the ARCS charts will be displayed.
Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(3) Color Test] in that order.
The color pattern for the ARCS color test will be displayed.
You can check a display state of the display unit from the color pattern.
7
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to close the color pattern.

8
Chart
Portfolio
8-1
This chapter explains the methods of importing/updating the charts (S-57, S-63, C-MAP and ARCS). After import/
update procedure is completed, the updated charts can be displayed on the Navigation & Planning screen to use for
navigation.
To import/update the charts, the following items are required:
S-57 : Chart CD-ROM
S-63 : Chart CD-ROM and cell permit FD
C-MAP Ed.2 : Chart CD-ROM and authorization code
C-MAP Ed.3 : Chart CD-ROM, and dongle (eToken), license FD or code
ARCS : Chart CD-ROM, and license permit FD or code
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio

(1) Entering the Chart Portfolio (Startup Menu)
1) On the operation panel, turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key.
The Startup menu will then be displayed.
[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the in the startup menu.
Then, the Chart Portfolio screen will be displayed.
Note:
The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for about 10
seconds.
8 Chart Portfolio 8-2

(2) Entering Chart Portfolio (Navigation & Planning menu)
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1) Create] in that order.
The Chart Portfolio screen will be displayed.
When Starting Chart Portfolio from the Navigation & Planning Menu
Both Navigation & Planning and Chart Portfolio are running concurrently. When changing the display from
Navigation & Planning to Chart Portfolio, select the following in order.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(2) Top Window] in that order.
To switch the display from Chart Portfolio to Navigation & Planning, select the following in order.
In the Chart Portfolio menu
Select [Tool] - [Change Navigation & Planning] in that order.
Note:
When Chart Portfolio is started by selecting [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1)
Create] from Navigation & Planning, be sure to exit Chart Portfolio before exiting Navigation &
Planning.
It is not possible to select Chart Portfolio when the relative motion mode is selected or the radar
image is displayed.
8
If C-MAP Ed.3 chart is installed, Chart Portfolio cannot be started through Navigation & Plan-
ning.
[Chart Portfolio Screen] Menus Buttons [Exit] Button
Source Chat Table/System Chart Table The record of importing/updating process
Note:
CD-ROM is checked when starting Chart Portfolio.
If CD-ROM is in CD drive, starting time may take longer.
8-3 8 Chart Portfolio

(3) Exiting the Chart Portfolio
Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
1) Left-click the [Exit] button on the Chart Portfolio main screen.

Then, the following confirmation dialog box opens. Left-click the [OK] button to exit the Chart Portfolio.
If an ARCS chart has been imported/updated, an index (chart management information) is created after
the [Exit] button is pressed. If the power fails and Navigation & Planning cannot be started, see 10.6
Troubleshooting in page 10-15.

8.2 Chart Portfolio Screen
The Chart Portfolio main screen (see page 8-3) consists of the following parts:
Menus
Buttons (All button function can be accessible from the menu)
Chart table display area
(1) Menus
Chart:
[ARCS] - [Import/Regist Chart Permit]:

Opens Import/Enter Chart Permit panel for importing and registering the Chart Permit. (This is an 8
administration tool.)
[ARCS] - [Regenerate Index]:
Regenerates ADCS index (chart management information).
[C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code]:
Opens the C-MAP Authorization Wizard panel for license registration and confirmation operation.
[C-MAP Ed.3] - [Order/Regist/Confirm License]:
Opens the CM93/3 Registration Wizard panel for license registration and confirmation operation.
[C-MAP Ed.3] - [Update Charts]
Opens the C-MAP Ed.3 Chart Update panel for chart update operation.
[Import/Update]:
Starts importing/updating the charts read from the CD-ROM.
[Abort]: Aborts the importing/updating processing.
[Exit]: Exits the Chart Portfolio.

Sort:
Selectable chart types
[Retry Auto-Detect]:
Left-clicking this menu will re-read the charts of the selected type from the CD-ROM.
Chart types ([S-57], [S-63 (Offline)], [C-MAP Ed.2], [C-MAP Ed.3] or [ARCS]):
The charts of the selected type will be displayed in the source/system chart table in the Chart Portfolio main screen.
Edit:
[Selectable Filter]:
Turns ON/OFF the filtering function.
[Select All]:
Selects the all cells/zones in the source chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
[Delete]:
Delete the selected cell in the system chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
View:
[Chart Information]:
Shows the detailed cell information of the chart being selected in the source or system chart table on the
Chart Portfolio main screen. (For S-57/S-63/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3)
[ARCS License Information]:
Checks the validity of the ARCS license information and shows the check result.
[Log]:
Displays the log on the right side of the screen during importing/updating process. Other log may be
displayed.
[Last Update]:
Last Update instead of Expiry is displayed in the System Chart column of ARCS. A date of updating
by Chart Portfolio is displayed in the Last Update column.

[Expiry]:
Expiry instead of Last Update is displayed in the System Chart column of ARCS. A term of validity
of the chart is displayed in the Expiry column.
[View old Edition]
As the latest edition is installed in the system, the older editions will not be displayed in the source chart
table.
Selecting this menu will show the older editions in the source chart table, and make it possible to use them
as desired.
Tool:
Note:
This is an administration tool. Do not use this menu.
[Selectable Filter]:
Filters the source charts to be displayed in the source chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
[Clear Log]
Clears the log.
[Option]:
8
Used to set options for S-57, S-63, C-MAP Ed.2, C-MAP Ed.3, ARCS, Boot and Advanced
panels.
[Technical Tool]:
(An administration tool.)
[Change Navigation & Planning]:
This item will be valid when [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1) Create] is selected from the
Navigation & Planning menu. Chart Portfolio will not be displayed. In order to redisplay the Chart
Portfolio, select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(2) Top Window] from the Navigation &
Planning menu.
Note:
[Change Navigation & Planning] will only close the Chart Portfolio display. It will not exit Chart
Portfolio. In order to exit Chart Portfolio, left-click the [Exit] button.
When C-MAP Ed.3 is installed in the system, it takes approximately 10 seconds for Option
panel of Tool menu to open after it was selected.
Version:
[Chart Portfolio Version]:

Opens the version Version panel.

Left-clicking this menu will re-read the charts of the selected type from the CD-ROM.
Starts importing/updating the charts.
Aborts the importing/updating processing.
Shows the detailed information of the chart being selected in the source or system chart
table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
Displays the log on the right side of the screen during importing/updating process.
Exits the Chart Portfolio.

(3) Table view
Initially, chart table is displayed on the Chart Portfolio main screen, and the source charts read from the CD-
ROM are displayed in the source chart table. (If no CD-ROM is in the CD drive, no chart will be displayed in
the source chart table. In this case, insert a CD-ROM and left-click the [Auto Detect] button.)
The Chart Portfolio main screen has two tables, the source chart table and system chart table. Each table can
be selected by left-clicking the respective tabs.
Source Chart table: Display the charts read from the CD-ROM.
System Chart table: Displays the stored charts in the system. When the source charts are imported/updated,
they are stored in the system and appear in the system chart table.
S-57 Chart
[Source Chart Table] Tabs
Chart : Name of the chart.

Scale : Scale of the chart. 1:overview indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged succes-
sively in order of 2:general, 3:coastal, 4:approach, 5:harbour and 6:berthing.
UpNo. : Displayed in x-y format.
x and y denote edition and update numbers, respectively. For example, UpNo.3.0-8 indicates that
the base chart having edition No.3.0 has been updated 8 times. It also means that one base chart and
8 update charts, that is, total of 9 charts are included in the source chart.
Publish : Date when the chart is published.

[System Chart Table]
- mark
+ mark
Last Update : The date when the chart was updated in Chart Portfolio.
Accepted :
Yes Updated chart has been merged with the original chart.
No Updated chart has not been merged with the original chart. Use Navigation & Planning screen
to merge them. See 3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart.
How to select a chart (file) from System Chart table:

For example, to select a chart from the folder n30120, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder S57 twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder S57 appear.
2) Left-click the folder lon120 twice quickly.
The folders included in the folder lon120 appear.
3) Left-click the folder n30120.
The charts included in the folder n30120 are displayed in the table as shown above.
4) Left-click the desired chart in the table to select it.
To close the folder S57, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also open/close the folder using the + and - marks in the folder tree.
Left-clicking + mark opens the folder to show the lower-order folders included in it.
Left-clicking - mark closes the folder to put back the lower-order folders into it.

S-63 Chart
[Source Chart Table]
8
Chart : Name of the chart
Scale : Scale of the chart. 1:overview indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged succes-
sively in order of 2:general, 3:coastal, 4:approach, 5:harbour and 6:berthing.
UpNo. : Displayed in x-y format.
x and y denote edition and update numbers, respectively. For example, UpNo.3.0-8 indicates that
the base chart having edition No.3.0 has been updated 8 times. It also means that one base chart and
8 update charts, that is, total of 9 charts are included in the source chart.
Publish : Date when the chart is published.
Permit : Shows the presence or absence of certification. S-63 requires SA Certificate file. (See 8.3.3 Import/
Update of S-63 Chart.)
Only the charts that were certified by SA Certificate file are displayed on Source Chart Table. For
this reason, all the charts on the table have Yes in Permit column.

Last Update : The date when the chart was updated in Chart Portfolio.
Accepted :
Yes Updated chart has been merged with the original chart.
No Updated chart has not been merged with the original chart. Use Navigation & Planning screen
to merge them. See 3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart.

1) Left-click the folder S57 twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder S57 appear.
To close the folder S57, left-click it twice quickly.

C-MAP Ed.2 Chart
8
Zone : List of zones.


Scale level : Scale: Scale of the chart. A indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged suc-
cessively in order of B, C, D, and E. Z is a worldwide chart.
Zone : Zone number.

1) Left-click the folder CM93 Ed.2 twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder CM93 Ed.2 appear.
To close the folder CM93 Ed.2, left-click it twice quickly.

C-MAP Ed.3 Chart
8
Database : Name of the database.
Issue No : Issue number of the chart.

Name : Name of zone or area under contract.

Issue No : Issue number of the chart.
License : License number.
Expiry : Expiry date of license

For example, to select a chart from the folder World, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder CM93 Ed.3 twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder CM93 Ed.3 appear.
2) Left-click the folder World twice quickly.
The charts included in the folder World appear.
To close the folder CM93 Ed.3, left-click it twice quickly.

ARCS Chart
8
Scale : Scale of the chart.
UpNo. : Update number.
Ed.Date : Date when the chart is published.
Service :
NS (Navigator Service)
Indicates that the chart is provided under license agreement.
If the chart is updated during the term of agreement, update service is available.
SS (Skipper Service)
Indicates that the chart was purchased.
Update service is not available.

Last Update/Expiry : Display of Last Update and Expiry can be changed over in the View menu.
Last Update Date when the chart is updated in Chart Portfolio.
Expiry Expiry date of the chart.

For example, to select a chart from the folder NS, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder ARCS twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder ARCS appear.
2) Left-click the folder NS twice quickly.
The charts included in the folder NS appear.
To close the folder ARCS, left-click it twice quickly.

8.3 Overview Flow Chart
8.3.1 Overview Flow Chart
The following flow charts describe the overview of import/update operation of the charts in Chart Portfolio.
(1) Import/update of S-57 chart
Start
Update CD
The type of your CD-ROM?
Base CD
Import of chart (8.3.2.1) Update of chart (8.3.2.2)
8
YES
Other CDs to use?
NO
End

(2) Import/update of S-63 chart
Start
YES
SA Certificate file (such as primar.crt)
already imported?
NO
Import SA Certificate file (8.3.3.1)
Select SA Certificate file (8.3.3.2)
YES
Cell Permit already imported?
NO YES
New Cell Permit obtained?
Import Cell Permit (8.3.3.3)

NO
Update CD
Type of your CD-ROM?
Base CD
Import the chart (8.3.3.4) Update the chart (8.3.3.5)
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
End

(3) Import/update of ARCS chart
Start
Checkout (8.3.4.1)
YES
Chart Permit already imported?
NO YES
New Chart Permit obtained?
Import Chart Permit. (8.3.4.2)

NO
Update CD
8
Base CD
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
End

(4) Import/update of C-MAP Ed.2 chart
Start
Checkout (8.3.5.1)
YES
Permission already acquired?
NO
Acquire Permission (8.3.5.2)
Update CD
Base CD
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
End

(5) Import/update of C-MAP Ed.3 chart
Import/update with CD
Start
Checkout (8.3.6.1)
Update CD
Base CD
YES
8
Other CD to use?
NO
YES
NO YES
New Permission acquired?

NO
End

Update with e-mail
Start
Checkout (8.3.6.1)
YES
Base CD already installed?
NO
Import the chart (8.3.6.2)
YES
NO
Update the chart with e-mail

(8.3.6.4)
End

8.3.2 Import/Update of S-57 Chart
8.3.2.1 Import of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio
1) Insert S-57 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

2) Select [Sort] - [S-57] in that order.
S-57 chart list is displayed.
S-57 chart list
If S-57 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

3) Left-click the [Import/Update] button.
The Import Condition panel opens.
[Import/Update] button

Import of S-57 chart is started.

Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the import result.
[Log] button
8
Import result
Number of charts imported Total number of charts to be imported

(Updated charts are counted in.)
Progress meter shows the progress of the import processing according to the capacity
of the chart files already processed.

5) After the import is completed, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
(2) Left-click the [Exit] button.
(1) Check that the import is completed.

8.3.2.2 Update of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio
1) Insert S-57 UPDATE CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

2) Select [Sort] - [S-57] in that order.
S-57 chart list is displayed.
S-57 chart list
If S-57 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.


Update of S-57 chart is started.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update with Naviga-
tion & Planning. (See 3.11 Accepting S-57 Updating Chart.)

Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the update result.
[Log] button
8
Update result
Number of charts updated

Total number of charts to be updated
(Charts updated previously are counted in.)
Progress meter shows the progress of the update processing according to the capacity

5) After the update process is completed, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
(1) Check that the update is completed.

8.3.3 Import/Update of S-63 Chart
Note:
ECDIS can use the charts published by more than one data server (PRIMAR STAVANGER, UKHO,
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.). It is necessary, however, to
import and select SA Certificate file to the system each time charts provided by a new data server are
used. Before importing the charts, for certification of ENC, import and select SA Certificate file con-
tained in Chart CD-ROM provided by the data server.
8.3.3.1 Import of SA Certificate file

1) Start Chart Portfolio.
2) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
The Option panel opens.
3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Import of Certificate...] button.
8
The Find file panel opens.

4) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and wait until it is ready to be read.
5) Select [D:] (D drive) from the Drive combo box (a) as shown below.
(c) (b)
(a)
6) Double-click [D:] in the Directory list box (b).
7) Double-click the file name of SA Certificate (such as primar.crt) in the File name list box (c).
8) Check the file name, and left-click the [OK] button.
The Import of SA Certificate panel opens.
Check the file name you have selected.

9) Check the SA Certificate information, and left-click the [OK] button.
Check the information of SA Certificate.
(This information is of PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO.)
10) As the message box appears, left-click the [OK] button to close the box.
Import procedure is completed. 8
1 in [1:primar.crt] indicates the order of adding CRT file.
primar.crt indicates the file name.
The file name varies depending on the data server.
(primar.crt for PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO, iho.crt for Hydrographic
and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.)

8.3.3.2 Selection of SA Certificate file
3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Select of Certificate...] button.
The Select of SA Certificate panel opens.
4) Select the SA Certificate of the data server to import or update charts.

(By default, 0:IHO.CRT of Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard is se-
lected.)

5) Check the information of SA Certificate, and left-click the [OK] button.
Check the information of SA Certificate.

(This information is of PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO.)
6) Check the file name of SA Certificate (such as [1:primar.crt]), and left-click the [OK] button to close the
panel.
8
1 in [1:primar.crt] indicates the order of adding CRT file.
primar.crt indicates the file name.
The file name varies depending on the data server.
(primar.crt for PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO, iho.crt for Hydrographic
and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.)
8.3.3.3 Import of Cell Permit


3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Import Cell Permit...] button.
4) Insert Cell Permit CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and wait until it is ready to be read.
5) Select [D:] (D drive) from the Drive combo box (a) as shown below.
(c) (b)
(a)
6) Double-click [D:] in the Directory list box (b).
7) Double-click the file name of Cell Permit (such as PERMIT.TXT) in the Filen ame list box (c).
Note:
When Cell Permit is supplied in FD, insert it into the FD drive, and select [A:] (A drive).

9) As the Completed panel appears, left-click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the Option panel.
8
10) Check the number of chart license, and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Import procedure of S-63 Cell Permit is completed.
Check the number of chart license.

8.3.3.4 Import of S-63 Chart
1) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-63(Offline)] in that order.
S-63 chart list will appear in several minutes.
Note:
Decoding of chart and checking of permission start.
This processing takes several minutes or more (30 minutes, for example) depending on the num-
ber of chart license.

S-63 chart list

The S-57/S-63 Import/Update panel opens.
Note:
If the BASE version includes UPDATE information (such as PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO),
a panel as shown below opens, so left-click the [OK] button.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update with
Navigation & Planning. 8
Structure, format and validity of the chart are checked.

Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the import result.
[Log] button
Import result
Number of charts imported Total number of charts to be imported excluding invalid ones

5) Check that the import is completed, and then, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
8.3.3.5 Update of S-63 Chart

1) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-63(Offline)] in that order.
S-63 chart list will appear in several minutes.
Note:
Decoding of chart and checking of permission start.
This processing takes several minutes or more (30 minutes, for example) depending on the num-
ber of chart license.

S-63 chart list

The S-57/S-63 Import/Update panel opens.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update with Naviga-
tion & Planning. (See 3.11 Accepting S-57 Updating Chart.)

Structure, format and validity of the chart are checked.
Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the update result.

8
[Log] button
Update result

Number of charts updated Total number of charts to be updated excluding invalid ones
5) Check that the update is completed, and then, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.

8.3.4 Import/Update of ARCS Chart
8.3.4.1 Checkup of ARCS
Expiry date of license (Chart Permit)

The license (Chart Permit) has an expiry date.
(d) (a) (b) (c)
Course of time
Present date One month One month
Expiry date of license
(a) For 30 days before the expiry date of license

A warning message is displayed for 30 days before the expiry date of license. See 14.2.1 Alarm Information of
ARCS Chart.
(b) For 30 days after the expiry date of license

An error message is displayed for 30 days after the expiry date of license. See 14.2.1 Alarm Information of
8
ARCS Chart.
The license is invalid, but ARCS chart can be displayed without any problem.
(c) From 30 days after the expiry date onward

An error message is displayed. The license is invalid, and ARCS chart cannot be displayed. See 14.2.1 Alarm
Information of ARCS Chart.
(d) If ARCS chart has been displayed normally but will not be displayed from a certain point of time, either
of the following may be the cause.
ARCS chart you have used was the trial version (available free of charge for 3 months).
The details of the license agreement were changed.
Note:
For the details of the license agreement, contact the owner of the vessel.

8.3.4.2 Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio
(1) Import of ARCS chart permit
1) Insert the ARCS license FD into the FD drive, and start Chart Portfolio.
2) Select [Chart] - [ARCS] - [Import/Regist Chart Permit] in that order.
The Import/Enter Chart Permit panel opens.
3) Left-click the [Browse...] button.

4) Select [A:] (A drive) from the Drive combo box (a) as shown below.
(c) (b)
(a)
5) Double-click [A:] in the Directory list box (b).

6) Double-click the file name of ARCS license (such as gb.ncp) in the File name list box (c).

The display returns to the Import/Enter Chart Permit panel.

Import of ARCS Chart Permit is completed.
Note:
After the import of ARCS Chart Permit is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file.
While the file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of Chart Portfolio screen is in gray color
and disabled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40 minutes
at the most.)

(2) Checking of ARCS chart permit
2) Left-click the [ARCS] tab to check the license information.
The number of licensed ARCS

charts
ARCS license is not imported.

3) Select [View] - [ARCS License Information] in that order.
The ARCS License Information panel opens.
4) The following license information is displayed.

Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

(3) Import of ARCS chart
1) Insert ARCS chart CD-ROM into the CD drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [ARCS] in that order.
ARCS chart list is displayed.
ARCS chart list
If ARCS chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

Import of ARCS chart is started.
Left-clicking of the [Log] button will show the import result.
[Import/Update] button [Log] button
Import result
Number of imported charts Total number of charts to be imported
Progress meter shows the progress of the import processing according to the number

Note:
After the import of ARCS chart is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file. While the
file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of Chart Portfolio screen is in gray color and dis-
abled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40 minutes at the
most.)

8.3.4.3 Update of ARCS in Chart Portfolio
1) Insert ARCS chart CD-ROM into the CD drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [ARCS] in that order.
ARCS chart list is displayed.
ARCS chart update list
If ARCS chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

Update of ARCS chart is started.
Left-clicking of the [Log] button will show the update result.
[Import/Update] button [Log] button
Update result
Number of updated charts Total number of charts to be updated
Progress meter shows the progress of the update processing according to the number

Note:
After the update of ARCS chart is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file. While the
file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of Chart Portfolio screen is in gray color and dis-
abled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40 minutes at the
most.)

8.3.5 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart
8.3.5.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.2
Setting of work area

2) Left-click the [Advanced] tab, and then, left-click the [Advanced Option...] button.
The Advanced Option panel opens.

3) Set the work area.
Use work area for C-MAP check box.
8
Use work area for C-MAP check box is blank. (Default)
[Merit]
Less time is required for import processing. (It takes approximately 5-6 hours to import the
charts worldwide.)
[Demerit]
Change of Chart CDs is required every one or two hours.
Use work area for C-MAP check box is checked.

[Merit]
Once the full chart data (3 CDs) is copied (it takes only 30 minutes), there is no need of
changing of CDs thereafter.
[Demerit]
Import processing takes long time. (It takes approximately 8 hours to import the charts world-
wide.)
Note:
Recommended setting of Use work area for C-MAP check box is blank.

8.3.5.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio
(1) Acquisition of Permission (AUTHORIZATION CODE)
1) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code] in that order.
The C-MAP Authorization Wizard panel opens.
2) Select [First use C-MAP Ed.2, or change subscription zone/areas.], and left-click the [Next>] button.
3) Insert C-MAP Ed.2 CD-ROM into the CD drive.

4) Left-click the [Next>] button.

5) Select zones or areas, and left-click the [(4) Add [>>]] button. Then, left-click the [Next>] button.
Left-click the [(4) Add [>>]] button.
Select zones or areas.

6) Send USER CODE to C-MAP by e-mail or fax.
You will have AUTHORIZATION CODE from C-MAP.
USER CODE
(1) Send USER CODE.
(2) You will have AUTHORIZATION CODE.
Send to : C-MAP Norway C-MAP

User
e-mail address :
license @c-map.no
Fax No. : +47 51464701

7) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code] in that order.
The C-MP Authorization Wizard panel opens.
8) Select [Register AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP], and left-click the [Next>] button.
9) Enter AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP, and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Acquisition of AUTHORIZATION CODE is completed.
Enter AUTHORIZATION CODE re-

ceived from C-MAP.

(2) Import of C-MAP Ed.2 chart
1) Select [Sort] - [C-MAP Ed.2] in that order.
C-MAP Ed.2 chart list is displayed.
C-MAP Ed.2 chart list

Import of C-MAP Ed.2 chart is started.
8
[Import/Update] button [Log] button Import result
Number of imported charts Total number of charts to be imported

Note:
If the following error message is displayed, it indicates that you have entered a wrong AUTHORIZA-
TION CODE. Enter the AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP again.
Example for error message

8.3.5.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio
2) Left-click the [Import/Update] button. 8

Update of C-MAP Ed.2 chart is started.
[Import/Update] button [Log] button Update result
Number of updated charts Total number of charts to be updated


8.3.6 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.3
8.3.6.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.3
Expiry date of license (e-Token)

The license has an expiry date.
(a) (b)
Present date Course of time

Two months
Expir
(a) For 60 days before the expiry date of license

The following message is displayed for 60 days before the expiry date of license.
8
(b) After the expiry date of license
The following message is displayed. The chart is displayed only for 15 minutes after it is started.
Note:
If the message (a) or (b) above is displayed, the license should be updated. Contact a C-MAP dealer.

8.3.6.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio
(1) Import of C-MAP Ed.3 chart
If C-MAP Ed.3 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

Import of C-MAP Ed.3 chart is started.

[Log] button
8
Import result

(2) Acquisition of Permission
2) Left-click the [C-MAP Ed.3] tab, and then, [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
The Registration Wizard panel opens.
3) Select [Ordering], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Ordering].

4) Select zones or areas, and left-click the [Add->] button. Then and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Left-click the [Add->] button.
Select zones or areas.
Check [Purchase] as needed.

(In this case, any update services cannot be used.)
5) Insert an empty FD into the FD drive.

6) Check the order information, and left-click the [Save] button.
8
The Browse for Folder panel opens.
Check the order information.

7) Select the FD drive where the order information is saved, and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
The name of the saved file is order.txt.
Select the FD drive.
8) Send the saved order information (order.txt) to C-MAP by e-mail.

If the e-mail is not available, write down the order information, and send it by fax.
You will have a license issued by C-MAP.
(1) Send order.txt you have saved..
(2) You will have a license issued by C-MAP.
Send to : C-MAP Norway C-MAP

User
e-mail address :
license @c-map.no
Fax No. : +47 51464701

(3) Loading of eToken license
2) Left-click the [C-MAP Ed.3] tab, and then, [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
3) Select [Regist License], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Regist License].

4) Select [Add License form file], and left-click the [Load] button.
The Select License file panel opens.
Select [Add License from file]
5) Insert the eToken license FD into the FD drive.

6) Select [password.usr], and left-click the [Open(O)] button.
The Information panel opens.
Select password.usr.
7) Check that the loading is completed, and left-click the [OK] button.
The display returns to the Registration Wizard panel opens.
Check that the loading

is completed

9) A message indicating the completion of license registration appears. (It takes several seconds for the
message to appear.)
Then, left-click the [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
8
Message indicating the completion

of license registration.

10) Select [Confirm License], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Confirm License].
11) Check the license information, and left-click the [Close] button.
Check the license information.

(Information at left is a sample.)

13) Exit Chart Portfolio.
(4) Checking of chart display

8
1) Left-click [ ] in the startup menu to start Navigation & Planning.

2) Left-click the [MENU] button, and select [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS...] in that
order.
The Chart Option panel opens.
3) Left-click the [View Common] tab.

If the World check box is blank, check it.
Check the World check box.

4) Left-click the [View 1] tab, and select [C-MAP Ed.3].
Finally, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
[View 1] tab Select [C-MAP Ed.3].

8.3.6.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio
If C-MAP Ed.3 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

[Log] button
8
Update result

8.3.6.4 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart with E-mail
(1) What is the RTU (Real Time Updating) service?
RTU (Real Time Updating) service updates C-MAP Ed.3 chart via e-mail or Internet through the C-MAP
RTU server.
Update with e-mail
(1) Order (2) E-mail sent
ECDIS User C-MAP RTU

server
(1) Create an order file (e.g., JRC eT 30001.ord) with Chart Portfolio, and save the order file on a floppy disk.
(2) Attach the order file to e-mail, and send it to the RTU server (E-mail: updates@c-map.no).
(4) Update of charts (3) Reply e-mail sent
ECDIS User C-MAP RTU

server
(3) Pieces of reply e-mail with an update file (e.g., u001x002.ans) being attached are automatically sent by
the RTU server.
(4) Save the update files on a floppy disk or CD-R/RW, and update C-MAP Ed.3 chart with Chart Portfolio.
E-mail address of C-MAP RTU server
E-mail: updates@c-map.no

(2) Update of C-MAP Ed.3 chart with e-mail
1) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.3] - [Update Charts] in that order.
The C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update panel opens.
2) Left-click the [Create Chart Update Order to send via E-mail] button.
The C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Create Chart Update Order to send via E-mail panel opens.
eToken number
(This number is given as an example.)
3) Insert an empty FD into the FD drive.

4) Select the Database to be updated from the Database list box (a).
5) Select the Zones or Areas to be updated from the Available list box (b), and left-click the [>] button (c).
6) Select a file size from the Select e-mail size combo box (d). The update files from the RTU server are
received in the selected size. [Recommended size: 1.44MB (Floppy)]
7) Left-click the [Create] button.
An order file is created, and the Select drive panel opens.
(a)
(b) (c)
(d)
Check this check box to select all signing Zones/Areas with

the Database selected in (a). (Recommended)
8) Select the FD drive where the order file is saved, and left-click the [OK] button.
Select the FD drive.

The name of the saved file is JRC eT *****.ord. (*****: eToken number)
(This file name is given as an example.)
10) Attach the saved order file JRC eT *****.ord to e-mail and send it to the C-MAP RTU server.
Pieces of e-mail with an update file (e.g., u001x002.ans) being attached are automatically send by the
RTU server.
(1) Send the order file you have saved.
(2) You will receive update files from the C-MAP

RTU server.
User C-MAP RTU server
E-mail address of C-MAP RTU server: updates@c-map.no

8
Note:
Confirm that an update file (*.ans) is attached to each piece of received e-mail.
Update file rule (splitting into parts of the file size set when an order is placed.)
uXXXxYYY.ans
YYY: File count
XXX: File number
Example: Division into four split files

u001x004.ans
u002x004.ans
u003x004.ans
u004x004.ans
11) Save the received update files on a floppy disk (CD-R/RW).
Note:
Be sure to save the update files in the root directory on a floppy disk (CD-R/RW).

12) Insert the floppy disk (CD-R/RW) containing the update files into the FD (CD) drive.
13) Left-click the [Apply Chart Update from Files] button.
A message box appears.
The message at left appears when the update files exist on the
floppy disk or CD-R/RW.
(Drive D for CD-R/RW)

16) Left-click the [Apply Updates] button.
Update of charts is started.
Searches the floppy disk

or CD-R/RW for the up-
date files.
The location where update files are saved is

displayed.
To use update files at another location, left-
click the [Browse] button and specify the
8
location.
The message at left is displayed while chart update

is in progress. The update may take several min-
utes.
17) When the update is completed, the following message box appears. Left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
If there are disks containing update files, repeat steps 16 and 17 to apply all the update files.

18) Left-click the [Close] button to close the C-MAP Chart Update - Apply Chart Update from Files panel.
19) Left-click the [Review Updates] button.

The C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Review Updates panel opens.

20) Select Database.
The details of Database are displayed in the lower field.
Database selection
Details of Database

Select the details of Database and right-click. The items below can be executed.
: Hydrographic Office
: Chart name
: Unit of update
: Object
Refresh Updates the details of Database.

Reject selected Rejects the update of selected data in the tree structure.
Delete mark of update (Cannot be selected at present.)
Double-clicking an object . displays the details of the object. (The display takes several tens of
seconds.)
Details of object

21) After confirming the update, click the [Close] button of the C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Review
Updates panel.
22) Left-click the [Close] button to close the C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update panel.
23) Left-click the [Exit] button to close [Chart Portfolio].

8
Left-click the [Exit] button.

8.4 Editing Operations (For C-MAP Ed.2)
8.4.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection (Selectable Filter)
To enable selectable filter which is used to filter the source charts displayed in the source chart table, you need
to set the selectable filter to ON state beforehand.
1) Select [Edit] - [Selectable Filter] in that order.
Each time you select it, Selectable Filter is turned ON and OFF. When it is selected, the check mark is
attached to Selectable Filter.
8.4.2 Selecting all Source Charts (Select All)

1) Select [Edit] - [Select All] in that order.
Then, the all cell/zones in the source chart table are selected for importing/updating.
8.4.3 Deleting the System Chart (Delete)

1) Select [Edit] - [Delete] in that order.
You can delete the selected system chart.

8.5 Filtering the Source Charts
(For C-MAP Ed.2)
You can filter the source charts in the source chart table. With this function, you can easily find the charts you want
to import/update.
1) Be sure that the selectable filter function is set to ON state. See 8.4.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection
(Selectable Filter) mentioned above.
2) Be sure that the source chart table is open. If not, left-click the Source Charts tab in the Chart Portfolio
main screen.
3) Select [Tool] - [Selectable Filter] in that order.
Then, the Selectable Filter panel opens.
8
Select filtering conditions by left-clicking the options.
Zone (Use only C-MAP):
Select one of items by left-clicking it.
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the Selectable Filter panel.

When the system enters the Chart Portfolio or when you left-click the [Auto Detect] button, the source
charts are filtered with the set filtering condition, and thus filtered source charts are displayed in the source
chart table.

8.6 View Operations
8.6.1 Getting Chart Information ([Information])
You can get information about the source chart or system chart.
1) Left-click one of charts in the source/system chart table, and then, left-click the [Information] button on
the screen.
Then, the Chart Information panel opens.
You can see the detailed information on that chart.

8.6.2 Viewing the Cell Permit Information (For S-63)
1) Select one of the source charts in the source chart table.
2) Select [View] - [Cell Permit Information (S-63)] in that order.
Then, the information panel will open.
8.6.3 Viewing the ARCS License Information (For ARCS)

1) Select [View] - [ARCS License Information] in that order.
Then, the validity of the ARCS license on the chart permit file (ARCS chart permit FD) is checked.
If the ARCS license is valid, the ARCS License Information panel opens, and the license information is
displayed.
If the ARCS license is invalid, blank is displayed in this panel.
8.6.4 Viewing the Version Information of the Chart Portfolio

1) Select [Version] - [Chart Portfolio Version] in that order.
Then, the version information panel will be displayed.

8.7 Setting the Chart Portfolio
You can change various settings for Chart Portfolio with the Option panel.
8.7.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update

Then, the Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the S-57 tab to the S-57 panel as shown above.
Left-click either option.

in Chart Portfolio: Updating is done in the Chart Portfolio. Namely, the updating charts are merged
with the original charts stored in the system after importing. The Accepted col-
umn in the system chart table shows whether the updating chart is already merged
or not. (Yes in the Accepted column shows that the imported chart is already
merged with the original chart. While, No shows that the imported chart is not
merged with the original chart yet.)
Select either Every Media or Every Chart by left-clicking it.
in Navigation & Planning:

Updating of the chart is not performed until you merge it on the Navigation &
Planning screen. In this case, you can merge the updating chart on the Navigation
& Planning screen. To merge it, Accept S-57 Updates menu will be used. For
detailed descriptions, see 3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the Option panel.

8.7.2 Setting the S-63 Options
2) Left-click the S-63 tab to open the S-63 panel.
Shows User Permit.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the Option panel. 8

8.7.3 Setting the C-MAP Options
2) Left-click the C-MAP tab to open the C-MAP panel.
Shows one of the license statuses.

You are Licensed.
You are NOT licensed.
You not register Authorization code.
Select one of options, List and select Zone (Recommend) or List and select 20deg Square.
List and select Zone (Recommend):
In the source chart table, source charts are displayed in the zone unit.
List and select 20 deg Square:
In the source chart table, source charts are displayed in 20x20 degrees unit.
[Register, confirm User/Authorized Code] button:
Left-clicking this button will open the following C-MAP Authorization Wizard panel. For detailed
operation, see (1) Acquisition of Permission (AUTHORIZATION CODE) in 8.3.5.2 Import of C-
MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio.
After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close the C-MAP Authorization Wizard panel.

8.7.4 Setting the ARCS Options
2) Left-click the ARCS tab to open the ARCS panel.
Shows one of the license statuses.

You have xxx chart(s) license.
xxx: Number of permission
You are NOT licensed.
[Import/Regist Chart Permit] button:

Left-clicking this button will open the Import/Enter Chart Permit panel. For detailed operation, see
(1) Import of ARCS chart permit in 8.3.4.2 Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio.
8
8.7.5 Setting the Boot Options
You can set various options that determine the operation when the system enters the Chart Portfolio.
2) Left-click the Boot tab to open the Boot panel.
You can select options by left-clicking them.

Automatic Import/Update:
Importing/Updating is automatically made when the Chart Portfolio is started.
Use Selectable Filter:
Source charts are filtered by the set filtering conditions when the Chart Portfolio is started.

8.7.6 Setting the Advanced Options
2) Left-click the Advanced tab to open the Advanced panel.
Select the following option by left-clicking it.

Sounds alarm(beep) after importing/updating completed:
Turns on/off the occurrence of alarm when import/update is completed. For the volume control of the
alarm sound, see 3.25 Setting the Alarm Options.
[Advanced Option] button:
Left-clicking this button will open the Advanced Option panel.
Specify the S-57 or S-63
source chart path.
Specify the C-MAP Ed.2

source chart path.
Specify the C-MAP Ed.3

source chart path.
Specify the ARCS source

chart path.
If you use multiple CDs to install

C-MAP, copy all information
from the CD-Rs to the work area
before installation.
Left-click the [OK] button to close the Advanced Option panel.
Note:
If Use work area for C-MAP check box is checked, import/update will take 2 to 3 times longer
than otherwise.

9
Playback
9-1
In the Playback, you can play back the logging data. The Playback screen is almost the same as for Navigation &
Planning. Also, the menu bar on the screen is the same as for the Navigation & Planning screen except for the [(9)
Playback] menu. Though the other menus are the same, there are some submenus you cannot use in the Playback.
9.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback

(1) Entering the Playback
1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key on the operation panel.
The startup menu appear on the display.
[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the in the startup menu.
Almost the same screen as for Navigation & Planning will open and the Staring Date/Time panel is
displayed.
Note:
The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10 seconds.
9 Playback 9-2
Special menu for playback:
In the Navigation & Planning screen, [(9) Maintenance] is used. However, in the Playback , [(9) Playback] is used,
instead.
Displays the Starting Date/Time panel.

Starts/Restarts the playback.
Pauses the playback.
Stops the playback.
Turns ON/OFF the Playback panel.
Table 9 Menu Tree
Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Selectable*

(1) Cursor (1) Scroll O
(2) Zoom Area O
(3) High Resolution Area O
(4) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) (1) Ship-Centered O
(2) Floating O
(5) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) (1) Ship-Centered O
(2) Floating O
(6) Remove EBL/VRM (1) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) O
(2) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) O
(7) Running Fix
(8) Remove Running Fix
O
O
9
(9) Activate AIS O
(1) Deactivate AIS O
(2) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information O
(3) Other Information O
(4) Maneuver Curve O
(5) Remove Maneuver Curve O
(6) Cross Bearing... O
(0) Option... O
(2) Chart (1) Marking / Highlighting (1) Event-Mark X
(2) Information Mark X
(3) Tidal Stream Mark X
(4) Highlight X
(5) Delete Event-Mark... X
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position... O
(2) Add to my Port List... O
(3) My Port List... O
(4) Home O
(3) ARCS (1) Select Chart under Cursor O
(2) Select Chart from all... O
(3) Change Active Panel O
(4) Load Low Resolution O
9-3 9 Playback
Table 9 Menu Tree -- Continued

(2) Chart (5) Note and Diagram O
(6) Temporary and Preliminary O
(7) Adjust Datum Offset... O
(8) Datum Transformation... O
(4) Select S-57 Chart... O
(5) User Charts (1) Select User Chart... O
(2) Chart Editor... X
(3) Unselect User Charts X
(6) Manual UpDating... O
(7) Scale (1) Select Scale... O
(2) Select Range... O
(3) Zoom In O
(4) Zoom Out O
(8) Azimuth (1) North Up O
(2) Course Up O
(3) Rotation O
(9) Motion (1) True O
(2) Relative O
(3) Free O
(1) Fix View O
(2) Accept S-57 Updates O
(3) Print Display O
(4) Save Screen O
(0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS... O
(2) Other Charts... O
(3) Scale... O
(3) Ship (1) Adjust (1) Cursor X
(2) Enter Position... X
(3) Enter Offset... X
(4) Clear Offset X
(0) Option... O
(4) View (1) Day-Night (1) Day Bright O
(2) Day Whiteback O
(3) Day Blackback O
(4) Dusk O
(5) Night O
(6) Panel Dimmer X
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 X
(2) Radar 2 X
(3) Range Rings X
(3) ARPA / AIS (1) ARPA1 O
(2) ARPA2 O
(3) Internal ARPA X
(4) AIS O
9 Playback 9-4

(4) View (5) ALL O
(6) ARPA Release All X
(7) Deactivate All AIS X
(8) ALL List O
(9) Select List O
(4) Analog Meter O
(5) Logbook X
(6) Multi View (1) Single View X
(2) Top Bottom X
(3) Right Left X
(4) Right Top View X
(5) Left Top View X
(6) Right Bottom View X
(7) Left Bottom View X
(8) Select Area X
(9) Wide Range View O
(0) Option (1) Radar... O
(2) ARPA/AIS... X
(3) Display Panel O
(4) Logbook... X
(5) Voyage Distance Clear O
(5) Route (1) Select Route...

(6) Date / Time... X
X
9
(2) Unload Route X
(3) Select Next WP... X
(4) Create Alternate Route X
(5) Planning (1) Table Editor X
(2) Graphic Editor X
(6) Calculate Distance to Run X
(0) Option... O
(6) Auto Sail (1) Start... X
(2) Stop X
(3) Start Avoiding X
(4) Stop Avoiding X
(0) Option... X
(7) Alarm (1) List... O
(2) History... O
(0) Option... X
(8) Tool (1) File Manager... O
(2) Chart Portfolio... (1) Create X
(2) Top Window X
(3) Chart Abbreviation O
(4) Navigation Data Graphs... O
(5) Set User Key O
(6) Bilingual X
9-5 9 Playback

(9) Playback (1) Starting Data/Time O
(2) Start O
(3) Pause O
(4) Stop O
(5) Playback Panel O
(0) Exit O
*Selectable O: You can select in Playback.

X: You cant select in Playback.
9 Playback 9-6
(2) Exiting the Playback
1) Left-click the [(0) Exit] menu and terminate the system in the same way as for Navigation & Planning
screen.
Display panels for playback operation
[For S-57/C-MAP] [For ARCS]
9-7 9 Playback
9.2 Playing Back the Logging Data
(1) Setting the starting date/time to be played back
1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Playback] - [(1) Starting Date/Time] in that order.
Then, the Starting Date/Time panel opens. (Initially, this screen is displayed.)
Logging data drop-down list*1
Date and time of recording end

Date and time of recording start
Selection of date and time to be played

back*2
(You can select date and time by sliding
the scroll bar or entering the values.)
*1 (Logging data): A series of logging files in which the logging date is continuing.
*2: Used to designate playback start time. During playback, the date and time that were recorded are
displayed.
2) Specify the above items to select the logging data to be played back, and then left-click the [OK] button.
(2) Displaying the Playback Panel

1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Playback] - [(5) Playback Panel] in that order.
Each time you select this menu, the Playback panel panel is turned ON and OFF. When it is ON, the
panel appears in the display panel.
Note that, depending on the playback status, some buttons are inactive.
[Pause] Button
[Start] Button [Stop] Button
[Date/Time] Button
Left-clicking this button will open the Start Date/
Time panel as shown above.
[Playback Speed Select] Button

Left-click this drop-down list button and then select the playback
speed you want by left-clicking it.
Even if the Playback Panel panel is closed, you can start, pause, or stop the playback from the menu.
9 Playback 9-8
(3) Starting playback
1) Left-click the [Start] button.
Then, playback starts at the speed you have selected in the Playback Panel.
Notes on Playback:
The time, date, and other information are not the current ones but the recorded ones as the logging data.
Playback Statues:
Stop: Shows STOP in red.
During playback: Shows PLAY in red.
When paused: Shows PAUSE in red.
2) To terminate the playback operation, left-click the [Stop] button.

To pause the playback, left-click the [Pause] button.
To cancel the pause, left-click the [Start] button again. 9
9-9 9 Playback
10
Maintenance
and
Inspection
10-1
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.
Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the

power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off
the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local
office to request servicing.
To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such as
thinner or benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.
Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface of the
equipment.
Notes:
Do not rub the surface of the LCD strongly with a dry cloth. Do not use benzene, alcohol, gasoline,
thinner, and the like for cleaning the LCD. Use of those items will cause the LCD surface to be dam-
aged and deteriorated. Be sure to use a soft cloth for wiping dirt off the surface of the tube lightly.
10 Maintenance and Inspection 10-2

10.1 Confirming Alarm
If a HARD alarm occurs, a hardware failure has been detected in this system.
Perform the following confirmation procedure:
(1) Confirmation procedure

1) Display the alarm list and read the detailed information.
(For how to display the alarm list, see 3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)
2) After reading the detailed information displayed in red, immediately perform the shutdown process to turn
off the power.
3) Ask the JRC sales representative or our local office for repair, reporting the alarm information.
(2) Explanation of hardware alarm messages

CPU Fan failed : The CPU fan has been stopped. (Repair needed)
CPU Temp rising : The CPU temperature has risen too high. (Repair needed)
Main Power supply Fan failed : The power supply unit (CBD-1627) fan has been stopped. (Repair needed)
ATX Power supply Fan failed : The ATX power supply unit fan has been stopped. (Repair needed)
LCD Fan failed : The monitor fan of the display panels chassis (CWB-1210) has been stopped.
(Repair needed)
Rack Fan failed : The rack fan has failed. (Repair needed)
DISK1 failed : Hard disk 1 has failed. (Repair needed)
DISK2 failed : Hard disk 2 has failed. (Repair needed) 10
10-3 10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.2 Daily Maintenance
The service life of the unit is greatly affected by how well it is maintained and inspected during daily maintenance.
To ensure that the unit is kept in optimum condition, we recommend that you inspect it daily. This also prevents the
unit from malfunctioning.
Inspect the unit according to the items indicated in the table below.
Maintenance and Inspection Method
No. Item Inspection Item
1 Cleaning Wipe off any dirt from the monitor display lightly with a soft, dry cloth.
Wipe off any dirt on the main unit case lightly with a dry cloth. In particular,
wipe air vents carefully with a brush to improve air circulation.
2 Inspection Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CW on the monitor to make sure that the
brightness of the monitor increases.
Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CCW on the monitor to make sure that the
brightness of the monitor increases.
Make sure that the trackball operates smoothly.
Press the [EBL] and [VRM] dials on the operation panel to make sure that
dials operate smoothly.
Press the [PANEL] key on the operation panel to make sure that the lighting
on the panel changes correctly.
Select [Color Pattern] to display the color test pattern, and adjust the bright-
ness/contrast. Also make sure that the necessary colors come out on the
monitor.
Select [Gray Scale] to display the gray scale pattern, and make sure that the
gray scale is displayed correctly.

10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57)
The color test pattern for the S-57 charts will be displayed.
1) Select the Color Pattern in the startup menu.
The color pattern becomes activated.
[Stertup Menu] [Color Pattern]
The color pattern can be displayed using any of the five color tables.
This color pattern is intended:
(a) for use by the mariner to check and if necessary re-adjust the brilliance and contrast controls, par-
ticularly for use at night.
(b) for use by the mariner to satisfy himself that an again ECDIS CRT remains capable of providing the
necessary color differentiation.
(c) for initial color verification of the day-black-background, dusk and night color table.
10
2) Right-click to see the pop-up menu.
Day Bright: A day-time color pattern will be displayed.

Day Whiteback: A relatively bright color pattern will be displayed.
Day Blackback: A color pattern against a black background will be displayed.
Dusk: A relatively dark color pattern will be displayed.
Night: A night-time color pattern will be displayed.
Exit: Exit the color pattern display and return to the startup menu.
3) Left-click on [Exit] from the pop-up menu to exit the color pattern.

10.2.2 Gray Scale
A gray scale pattern is displayed to check the brightness adjustment of the monitor.
Optimum brightness of the monitor can be obtained by adjusting the brightness so that the gray scale pattern can be
viewed clearly. The brightness of the monitor in the nighttime can also be optimally adjusted in the same way.
1) Select the Gray Scale in the startup menu.
The gray scale becomes activated.
[Stertup Menu] [Gray Scale]
2) Left-click anywhere on the gray scale to exit the gray scale. The startup menu will start up.

10.3 Replacing Consumables
The hard disk, UPS battery and LCD backlight used in this system have a limited service life, so that they should
better be replaced periodically.
The expected service life of these parts if the system is used constantly are as follows:
Number Part Nominal life Remarks
1 Hard disk Two years When the power supply is on constantly.
2 UPS battery Five years When the power supply is on constantly. If the system is
not used for long periods and battery charging/discharging
is repeated, then the nominal life may be shorter.
3 LCD backlight Five years When the power supply is on constantly.
Please consult with the store, sales agent or our branch office, sales offices or outlets for replacing the above parts.
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input

When AC power supply is stopped due to a blackout or the like, nothing is displayed on the monitor, but the display
information is backed up for one minute. If AC power is not supplied when one minute has passed, the system will
automatically start the shutdown process to terminate all the functions.
The following table shows the relations between the PWR FAIL lamp states and alarm sound while AC power is not
being supplied:
Inboard Backup Power Supply (24 VDC) PWR FAIL Lamp Alarm Sound
10
Connected Blinking*1 Yes*2
Not connected No change No
*1: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key changes the lamp state to lighted. The lamp goes off when AC power is
supplied.
*2: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key stops the alarm.

10.5 User Maintenance Menu
10.5.1 Backup Option
When you left-click the [ ] button on the Startup menu and the following message is displayed, change the setting
of the user-maintenance menu by the following procedure.
1) Move the cursor on the Startup menu. And right-click.
2) Password is required.
3) Input 0000 as the password.

4) The Startup menu is enhanced, and the user mainte-
nance menu is displayed.
5) Left-click [BackUp Option] button.
10
Dual drive (DISK1 and 2 - E: and F: drive) Default setting.

Data is read out from E:drive (Disk1).
Data is written into E:drive (Disk1) and F:drive (Disk2).
Master drive (DISK1 - E: drive) Only E:drive (DISK1) is used.
Backup drive (DISK2 - F: drive) Only F:drive (DISK1) is used.
* When the setting of present is Dual drive (DISK1 and 2 - E: and F: drive), select F: drive.
* When the setting of present is Master drive (DISK1 - E: drive), select F: drive.
* When the setting of present is Backup drive (DISK2 - F: drive), select E: drive.
* To copy data from the master disk to the backup disk, left-click the [Copy the new and change files to
Backup drive (except charts)] button.

6) Left-click [OK] button.
7) Left-click [Hide] button.
10.5.2 Hardware Key Information

This function is useful for comfirming USER PERMIT and PIN No.
These information will be needed as purchasing ARCS chart.

10.6 Troubleshooting
If the unit is not working properly, check the following points and carry out the appropriate repair before you ask for
repair.
If the following remedies do not rectify the problem, or a location not mentioned in the following tables is not in
order, contact the nearest JRC office or agent, and ask for repair.
Symptom Cause Remedy
Power does not turn ON. The AC power is not ON. Turn the AC power ON.
The breaker in the main unit Turn the breaker ON. *

power supply is not ON.
When 220V input is being used, Switch the input protective circuit
the input protective circuit switch switch to AC 220V.
of the power supply is set to AC
110V.
AC power is not being input Input AC power within the rated

within the rated range. range.
The AC power cable is not con- Call the JRC sales representative
nected to the main unit. for repair.
Malfunction of main unit. Call the JRC sales representative

for repair.
POWER FAIL lamp is lit. DC power is not being supplied Supply DC power from the dis-
from the distribution board. tribution board.
The AC voltage has dropped. Input AC voltage within the rated

range. 10
The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.
* Lift the lever to turn the breaker ON.
Breaker
ON: Up
OFF: Down

FAN alarm message is displayed on the The fan motor has stopped. Immediately turn the power OFF,
LCD monitor. and contact the nearest JRC of-
fice or agent, and ask for repair.
for repair.
Nothing is displayed on screen. The power switch is not ON. Turn the power switch ON.
The monitor has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative

for repair.
The video cable is not connected. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.
for repair.
Incorrect display The video cable is not connected. Call the JRC sales representative
(terminal fault) for repair.
for repair.
The display is shown out of place. The initial setup was faulty. For JAN-701, keep the brilliance
control pressed for a while. The dis-
play will be adjusted automatically.
For JAN-901M, press the bril-

liance control. The display will be
adjusted automatically.
Radar echo is not displayed correctly. The video cable is not connected. Call the JRC sales representative
(terminal fault) for repair.
The connector cable is not con- Call the JRC sales representative
nected to the radar. for repair.
for repair.
Chart Portfolio is working. Stop Chart Portfolio.
Gyro compass is not displayed, and The initial setup has not been car- Carry out the initial setup cor-
"GYRO" alarm is displayed. ried out correctly. rectly.
The gyro compass is not ON. Turn the gyro compass ON.
The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between

nected to the gyro compass. the gyro compass and main unit.
The ratio setting on the gyro com- Set the ratio setting on the gyro
pass is incorrect. compass correctly.
The polarities of the connector Connect the cable at the correct

cable are incorrect. polarities.
for repair.
Rudder angle is not displayed. Or, is not The rudder angle indicator is not Turn the rudder angle indicator
displayed correctly. ON. ON.
The ratio setting on the rudder Set the ratio setting on the rudder
angle is incorrect. angle.
The rudder angle indicator setting Set the rudder angle indicator cor-
is incorrect. rectly.

nected to the rudder angle indi- the rudder angle indicator and the
cator. main unit.
for repair.
Log is not displayed. The log is not ON. Turn the log ON.
The ratio setting on the log is in- Set the ratio setting on the log
correct. correctly.

nected to the log. the log and the main unit.
for repair.
Data is not displayed, even though the The analog data setup has not Carry out the analog data setup
data below is input. been set correctly. correctly.
Relative wind direction and wind speed
Air temperature The interface board is not ON. Turn the interface board ON.
Water temperature
Pitch
Roll
The connector cable is not con-
nected to the interface board.
Check the connection between
the interface board and the main
10
CPP angle unit.
for repair.
Position information (e.g. GPS, gyro) is The initial setup has not been car- Carry out the initial setup cor-
not displayed. ried out correctly. rectly.
The navigation unit is not mea- Check the state of the navigation
suring. unit.
The navigation unit is not ON. Turn the navigation unit ON.

nected to the navigation unit. the navigation unit and the main
unit.
for repair.

ARPA is not displayed. The [ARPA] key is not pressed. Press the [ARPA] key.
The ARPA setting is incorrect. Set the ARPA setting correctly.
The radar is not turned ON. Turn the radar ON.

nected to the radar. the radar and main unit.
for repair.
Wind direction, wind speed (digital wind The digital wind direction and air Turn the digital wind direction
direction and air speedometer) are not speedometer are not ON. and air speedometer ON.
displayed.
The connector cables are not con- Check the connection between
nected to the digital wind direc- the digital wind direction and air
tion and air speedometer. speedometer.
for repair.
UKC is not displayed. The depth sounder is not ON. Turn the depth sounder ON.

nected to the depth sounder. the depth sounder and the main
unit.
for repair.
Engine data from data logger and The data logger is not ON. Turn the data logger ON.
weather data are not displayed.
nected to the data logger. the main unit and the data logger.
for repair.
Automatic sailing is not possible. The initial setup has not been car- Carry out the initial setup cor-
ried out correctly. rectly.
Operation is not carried out cor- Carry out the correct operation
rectly. referring to the Instruction
Manual.
The autopilot is not ON. Turn the autopilot ON.

nected to the autopilot. the autopilot and the main unit.
for repair.

The brightness does not change even if The lighting control circuit does Call the JRC sales representative
the [BRILLIANCE] knob is turned. not work. for repair.
The cable is damaged. Call the JRC sales representative

for repair.
for repair.
None of the keys on the operation panel The cursor is displayed as an Wait until the hourglass returns to
work. hourglass. a cursor.
The operation panel circuit is Call the JRC sales representative

malfunctioning. for repair.
for repair.
The trackball does not work. The trackball is dirty. Clean the trackball.
for repair.
The [EBL] and [VRM] dials do not work The [EBL] and [VRM] dials are Press the [EBL]/[VRM] keys.
even if turned. Or, response is slow. not ready for operation.
The knob is not secured to the Use a hexagonal wrench to secure

shaft. the knob to the shaft.
for repair.
The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and [SEA/

RAIN] dials do not work even if turned.
The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and
[SEA/RAIN] dials are not ready
Press the [RADAR] key. 10
Or, response is slow. for operation.
The knob is not secured to the Use a hexagonal wrench to secure

shaft. the knob to the shaft.
for repair.
When the [ ] (Navigation & Planning) Hard disk failure See 10.5 User Maintenance
button is left-clicked in the startup menu, Menu.
the message Path is incorrect or Master
Drive is failed is displayed.
The power was turned off during ARCS Chart index failure Start Chart Portfolio, select
index creation by Chart Portfolio, and [Chart] - [ARCS] - [Regenerate
Navigation & Planning cannot be started Index] to create the chart index
with an error message being displayed. again.

Error code (0XFFFFFFA) is displayed in Wrong authorization code was Input the proper authorization
Chart Portfolio. input. code you obtained again.
Error code (0xFFFFFF73) is displayed Reading from CD-ROM was Clean the CD-ROM, and perform
while ARCS chart is imported in Chart faulty. the import procedure again. If the
Portfolio. error persists, the CD-ROM or
CD-ROM drive may be out of
order.
Contact the distributor of the chart
to request for replacement of CD-
ROM, or contact the JRC sales
representative to request repair of
the CD-ROM drive.
When the [ ] (Navigation & Planning) Dongle (key lock device) is bro- Call the JRC sales representative
button is left-clicked in the startup menu, ken or the information of Dongle for repair.
the message ECDIS License Invalid is and Software are not matched.
displayed.
ARCS chart is not displayed. Chart is imported when the term Register the latest Chart Permit
of validity of ARCS has expired. within the expiration date, and
then import ARCS chart.
Chart Permit was registered when
the term of validity of ARCS has
expired.
PIN input was canceled when Input PIN when starting Naviga-
Navigation & Planning was tion & Planning, and select ARCS
started. chart. ([Menu] - [Chart] - [Op-
tion] - [S57/C-MAP/ARCS])
ARCS chart will not be displayed, though Chart Permit type was changed Contact the retailer from whom
it has been displayed normally by that from trial version to regular con- ARCS was purchased to check
time. tract. the details of the contract.
Details of contract were changed.
Alarm occurs frequently while ARCS ECDIS has detected the alarm in- Check the details of the alarm.
chart is displayed. formation regarding ARCS chart See 14.2.1 Alarm Information of
itself and displayed the alarm. ARCS Chart.
Error message ????Earcs.dll???? is Index was not generated in Chart Re-generate Index in Chart Port-
displayed when Navigation & Planning Portfolio for such reasons as folio. ([Chart] - [ARCS] - [Regen-
is started. forced termination of this equip- erate Index])
ment during ARCS Index genera-
tion.

eToken panel is displayed in Navigation & Planning or It is an authentication pro- Press Cancel button.
Chart Portfolio, and a password is demanded. cedure when C-MAP se-
curity device (eToken) is
accessed.
Message C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) not C-MAP security device Press [POWER] to exit
found is displayed in Navigation & Planning. (eToken) was not recog- software and OS, and
nized. then, press [POWER]
again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to keep
[POWER] pressed to turn
off the power.
Message System detected non response from security C-MAP security device Press [POWER] to exit
device (eToken),and needs to reboot. Please press
[POWER] button shutdown. is displayed in Chart
(eToken) was not recog-
nized.
software and OS, and
then, press [POWER] 10
Portfolio. again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to keep
[POWER] pressed to turn
off the power.
Message Confirm CD type, and retry Auto Detect. A CD is not inserted in the Insert the chart CD into
is displayed in Chart Portfolio. CD-ROM drive. the CD-ROM drive.
The CD in the CD-ROM

drive is not a chart CD.

Message CD is not inserted, or this CD might have The path setting is wrong. Set the path correctly.
errors. Confirm, or contact with your chart provider.
is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
C-MAP Ed.3 chart is not displayed. The eToken license is in- Register the latest valid
valid. eToken license and import
C-MAP Ed.3 chart. (See
14.2.2 Alarm Informa-
tion of C-MAP Ed.3
Chart.)
C-MAP Ed.3 chart that used to be displayed is no longer The details of the license Ask your C-MAP Ed.3
displayed. agreement have been distributor for the details.
changed.
Startup Menu is in hang-up state. C-MAP security device Install C-MAP security
(eToken) is not installed. device (eToken).
Message error (0xFFFFFFFA) or Error: Bad Au- Authorization code is Enter the received autho-
thorization Code or file format error is displayed in wrong. rization code again.
the log window of Chart Portfolio.
A chart list is not displayed with Chart Portfolio. Selectable Filter is set. Turn off Selectable Filter.
Message Insert another C-MAP Ed.2 CD. is displayed Selected zones are not un- Select zones under con-
in Chart Portfolio. der contract. tract, and import/update
data.
Message error (0x000000xx) is displayed in the log See 14.2.3 Alarm Infor- See 14.2.3 Alarm Infor-
window of Chart Portfolio. mation of S-57/S-63 mation of S-57/S-63
Chart. Chart.

Message There is no licensed chart. is displayed in This CD does not contain Insert the licensed CD into
Chart Portfolio. any licensed charts. the CD-ROM drive.
Message Warning SA public key supplied on the ENC The selected SA Certifi- Select the SA Certificate
media unmatches the pre-installed SA public key. is cate file is incorrect. file relevant to the data
displayed in Chart Portfolio. server.
Message Errors occurred in Decryption! Refer the log Cell Permit is not im- Import correct Cell Per-
to check the detail. is displayed in Chart Portfolio. ported yet. mit.
Imported Cell Permit is

incorrect.
Cell Permit has been de-

leted.
Cell Permit has already

expired.
10

11
After-Sales
Service
11-1
11.1 Maintenance Service
Your equipment is guaranteed for one year after it is delivered to you.
11.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts

The replacement parts for repairing this equipment (parts essential to keeping the functional integrity of this equip-
ment) will be retained for ten years after its production is discontinued.
11.3 When Asking for Service

When you think the system is not operating normally, see 10.6 Troubleshooting, and check again. If the problem
still cannot be corrected, turn off the unit and consult your dealer, our agent, branch, sales department or subsidiary
for advice.
In that case, use the Repair Request Form at the end of this manual.
Repair during warranty period

Should a malfunction occur when the fishfinder has been operated according to descriptions and instructions in
the instruction manual, it will be repaired free of charge. However, breakdowns resulting from abuse, negli-
gence, natural disaster, fire or other unforeseeable incident will be charged.
Repair after warranty period

Repairs that restore normal operation made after the warranty period have to be paid in full by the client.
Product data that should be provided when you ask for service
* Name of product, model, date of manufacture and serial number
* Description of malfunction (as detailed as possible)
* Company address or name of organization, address and telephone number
11.4 Checks and Inspection

Product performance gradually declines with long use resulting in inaccurate measurements, although the rate of
this decline varies with frequency of use.
To prevent this, periodic inspection is required in addition to routine maintenance. For information on inspection,
contact your dealer.
Note that inspection is charged.
When you may not understand about after sales service, ask your dealer or our nearby sales department.
11 After-Sales Service 11-2

12
Disposal
12-1
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on
their and terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
12.1 Disposal of the Product

Dispose of the system in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
12.2 Disposal of Used Batteries

Lithium cells for backing up data at built into the system.
Do not store used lithium cells. Dispose of them as unburnable garbage.
Used lithium cells must be insulated, for example, by insulating the terminals with tape before disposal.
In local authorities that collect unburnable and burnable garbage, dispose of used lithium cells in accordance
with local bylaws and regulations.
For details, contact the nearest JRC office, agent or your local authority.
12.3 Disposal of LCD Module

The fluorescent lamp built in the LCD module contains mercury. When disposing of the LCD module, you need to
observe the ordinances or regulations of your local government.
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your skin,
wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes. If you find
any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the liquid gets in
your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes,
and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
12 Disposal 12-2
13
Specifications
13-1
13.1 Bridge Display Terminal
(1) Display 18.1 inch color LCD (JAN-701)
23.1 inch color LCD (JAN-901M)
Resolution : 1280 x 1024 (JAN-701)
Resolution : 1600 x 1200 (JAN-901M)
(2) Operation panel Keys and switches

Track ball
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) dial
VRM (Variable Range Marker) dial
Joystick
(3) Processor CPU mother board

Video board
Level interface board
8-channel serial interface A/B board
Gyro/log interface (NSK) board
Radar overlay board
Radar interface board
Power supply circuit (including UPS)
Terminal board circuit
Peripherals
Silicon disk
Hard disk (Two-set component of main and sub)
CD-ROM drive
Floppy disk drive (1.44 Mbyte)
(4) Environmental conditions IEC60945 Ver4.0 compliant
(5) Power voltage Voltage : AC100V to 115V/AC200V to 230V (10%)

Frequency : 60 Hz/50Hz (5%)
(6) Power consumption 330VA or less (JAN-701)

350VA or less (JAN-901M)
13 Specifications 13-2
14
Reference
14-1
14.1 Alarm Fuction
List*3
Level*4
Audible*5
Output*6
Logbook
Logging*7
Button*1 Message*2 Meaning*8 Condition*9
Alarm List - - - - - - - Always displayed. -

Green: No alarm
Red: Alarm occurred. (Blinks if not acknowledged
yet. Stays lit after acknowledgement.)
AUTO Automatic sailing failed 1 Automatic sailing cannot be continued. During automatic
By one of the following causes: sailing
POS1 error
GYRO error
Route error
CALL Generated Call-back 1 [A] Outputs a callback navigator alarm. During automatic
navigator By one of the following causes: sailing
ARR alarm does not occur even after 30 seconds.
Route alarm does not occur even after 30 seconds.
Setup Gyro initial course not set 3 - - Setting up is not completed. Always
By one of the following causes:
POS1 not select 3 - - Initial course for step/synchro gyro is not set.
Safety contour not set 3 - - Safety contour value is not set (default value
Shallow contour not set 3 - - unchanged).
Deep contour not set 3 - - Shallow contour value is not set (default value
Safety depth not set 3 - - unchanged).
Deep contour value is not set (default value
unchanged).
Safety depth value is not set (default value
unchanged).
A/P Autopilot failed 2 - Autopilot is defective or communication line is cut. Autopilot is
connected.
POS1 POS1 failed 1 POS1 (primary) is defective or communication line is Position measuring
cut. instrument is
POS1 not fix 2 POS1 is not fixed. connected
(including DR).
Datum is different 2 - Geodetic system between chart and measured position Position measuring
information being received differs. instrument is
connected
(including DR).
POS2 POS2 failed 1 - POS2 (secondary) is defective or communication line Position measuring
is cut. instrument is
POS2 not fix 2 - POS2 is not fixed. connected
(including DR).
Datum is different 2 - Geodetic system between chart and measured position Position measuring
information being received differs. instrument is
connected
(including DR).
JUMP POS1 shifted 2 - The shift amount of the primary position exceeds the User setting
limit being set.
DIFF POS1/POS2 difference 2 - The difference between the primary and second User setting.
exceed positions exceeds the limit being set. Position measuring
instrument is
connected to POS2
(including DR).
GYRO Gyro failed 2 - Gyro is defective or its line is cut. Gyro is connected.
LOG Log failed 2 - Log is defective or its line is cut. Log is connected.
LowSp Log speed is low 2 - Past 30 sec with Low SPD that Log speed is lower During automatic
2 kt than the limit (5 kt). sailing
ECC Arrived at Early Course 2 [A] Approaching WOL (1 to 6 minutes before arriving During ANTS
Change point at WOL) route navigation
ACC Arrived at Actual Course 2 [A] Approaching WOL (30 seconds before arriving at During ANTS
Change point WOL) route navigation
ACCa Not Acknowledge 2 [A] ECC/ACC in not acknowledge after 30 seconds of
ECC/ACC the arrival on WOL.
ARR Arrived at WP 2 Arrived at the WP. During Normal
route navigation
OffCo Course difference exceed 2 The difference between the course and bearing During route
exceeds the limit. navigation
XTE Cross track error exceed 2 The amount of the cross track error exceeds the limit. During route
navigation
Route Arrived at LAST WP 2 Arrived at the last WP on the sailing final leg. During route
navigation
14 Reference 14-2
List*3
Level*4
Audible*5
Output*6
Logbook
Logging*7
Radar BP failed 3 - - Rotation signal (BP) is out of specifications or signal During radar
line is cut. display
BZ failed 3 - - Rotation signal (BZ)is out of specifications or signal During radar
line is cut. display
Trigger failed 3 - - Trigger signal is out of specifications or signal line is During radar
cut. display
Video failed 3 - - Video signal is out of specifications or signal line is During radar
cut. display
Internal error 3 - - Error occurred in the board. During radar
display
ARPA1 ARPA 1 signal failed 3 - - ARPA1 is defective or signal line is cut. During ARPA1
display
ARPA2 ARPA 2 signal failed 3 - - ARPA2 is defective or signal line is cut. During ARPA2
display
Chart Loaded different datum 3 - - Different datum chart is loaded. Always
chart
Loaded unknown datum 3 - - [ARCS] Unknown datum chart is loaded. Always
chart
Chart image is Zoom out 3 - - [ARCS] Low-resolution chart is displayed. Always
ARCS Security failed 3 - - [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS security occurred. See 14.2.1 Alarm
Information of
ARCS Chart.
Not up to date 3 - - [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS updated.
SfCnt Crossing Safety Contour 2 [V] Crossing Safety Contour within set time. Always
AREA Crossing Traffic 2 [V] Crossing Traffic Separation Zone within settime. Vector=ON
Separation Zone (User setting)
Crossing Traffic Crossing 2 [V] Crossing Traffic Crossing within set time. Alarm item=ON
Crossing Traffic 2 [V] Crossing Traffic Roundabout within set time. (User setting)
Roundabout
Crossing Precautionary 2 [V] Crossing Traffic Precautionary within set time.
Crossing Two Way 2 [V] Crossing Two Way Traffic within set time.
Traffic
Crossing Deeper Water 2 [V] Crossing Deeper Water Route within set time.
Route
Crossing Recommended 2 [V] Crossing Recommended Traffic Lane within set
Traffic Lane time.
Crossing Inshore Traffic 2 [V] Crossing Inshore Traffic Zone within set time.
Zone
Crossing Fairway 2 [V] Crossing Fairway within set time.
Crossing Restricted Area 2 [V] Crossing Restricted Area within set time.
Crossing Caution Area 2 [V] Crossing Caution Area within set time.
Crossing Shore 2 [V] Crossing Shore Production Area within set time.
Production Area
Crossing Military Practice 2 [V] Crossing Military Practice Area within set time.
Area
Crossing Seaplane 2 [V] Crossing Seaplane Landing Area within set time.
Landing Area
Crossing Submarine 2 [V] Crossing Submarine transit lane within set time.
transit lane
Crossing Ice Area 2 [V] Crossing Ice Area within set time.
Crossing Channel 2 [V] Crossing Channel within set time.
Crossing Fishing Ground 2 [V] Crossing Fishing Ground within set time.
Crossing Fishing 2 [V] Crossing Fishing Prohibited within set time.
Prohibited
Crossing Pipeline Area 2 [V] Crossing Pipeline Area within set time.
Crossing Cable Area 2 [V] Crossing Cable Area within set time.
Crossing Anchorage Area
Crossing Anchorage
Prohibited

2
2

[V] Crossing Anchorage Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Anchorage Prohibited within set time. 14
AREA Crossing Spoil Ground 2 [V] Crossing Spoil Ground within set time. Vector=ON
Crossing Dumping 2 [V] Crossing Dumping Ground within set time. (User setting)
Ground Alarm item=ON
Crossing Dredge Area 2 [V] Crossing Dredge Area within set time. (User setting)
Crossing Cargo 2 [V] Crossing Cargo Transshipment Area within set
Transshipment Area time.
Crossing Incineration 2 [V] Crossing Incineration Area within set time.
Area
Crossing Specially 2 [V] Crossing Specially Protected Areas within set
Protected Areas time.
Dangerous Line 2 [V] Crossing Dangerous Line within set time.
Dangerous Area 2 [V] Crossing Dangerous Area within set time.
14-3 14 Reference
List*3
Level*4
Audible*5
Output*6
Logbook
Logging*7
DNG Approaching Obstruction 2 [S] Approaching obstruction Sector=ON

(User setting)
Approaching Under water 2 [S] Approaching under-water rock
rock
Approaching Wreck 2 [S] Approaching wreck
Timer Timer 2 - - Time out Timer=ON
(User setting)
HARD i CPU Fan failed 1 CPU fan is defective. Undecided
CPU Temp rising 1 CPU temperature is rising.
Main Power supply Fan 1 Main power supply fan is defective.
failed
ATX Power supply Fan 1 ATX power supply fan is defective.
failed
LCD Fan failed 1 - LCD fan is defective.
Rack Fan failed 1 Rack fan is defective.
Disk1 failed 1 Disk1 fan is defective.
Disk2 failed 1 Disk2 fan is defective.
AC offline 1 AC power is offline.
Battery Low 1 Battery of UPS is low voltage.
Note:
Some of the alarms may not be available depending on the system configuration used.
14 Reference 14-4
Remarks:
*1: Button
Button that will be displayed on the display panel when an alarm occurs. By left-clicking this button,
alarm acknowledgement is made for that button alarm.
*2: Message (detailed description of alarm)
When an alarm occurs, the alarm button blinks in red. At the same time, the detailed description of
the alarm is displayed in the message box at the bottom of the chart display area. When the [ALARM
ACK] button on the operation panel is pressed to acknowledge the alarm, the blinking alarm stops
and stays lit.
The following table shows the alarm display on the button, in the message box and the Alarm List
panel. The Alarm List panel opens when the [Alarm List] button is left-clicked.
Alarm button [Alarm List] button
[Alarm buttons on the display panel]

Example: Setup alarm --- Initial course of the gyro is not set. Also, POS1 is not selected.
Button/panel No alarm Alarm occurred Alarm acknowledged For unused alarm

[Alarm List] button Lights in green Blinks in red Stays lit in red -
Alarm button No display Setup (Blinks in red.) Setup (Stays lit in red.) No display
In the message box No display Gyro initial course not set No display No display
POS1 not select
"Alarm List" panel Button Setup (Lights in green) Setup (Blinks in red.) Setup (Stays lit in red.) Inactive
Description Gyro initial course not set (Blinks in red.) (Stays lit in red.) Inactive
POS1 not select Gyro initial course not set Gyro initial course not set
POS1 not select POS1 not select
*3: An alarm shown in the Alarm List panel.

*4: Level of alarm (1: High, 2: Mid, 3: Low)
*5: Audible sound from the equipment and dedicated keyboard (The sounding pattern varies with the
level of alarm.)
*6: Output supports serial interface and network interface.
*7: Log data recorded for playback function.
*8: [A]: Alarm used for ANTS only, [V]: Alarm detected by the danger detection vector (vector area),
[S]: Alarm detected by the guard ring (sector area)
*9: Condition to detect an alarm may depend on the hardware to be used.
14
14-5 14 Reference
14.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information
14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart
When ARCS chart is displayed on ECDIS, chart-related alarms may occur frequently. It is obligated to display
these alarms on ECDIS, and such frequent occurrence of the alarms is not the result of a malfunction of ECDIS.
JRCs ECDIS is designed to read the chart and permit information of ARCS and display such alarm information.
Time and/or place of error

No. Error message Procedure message display
1 ARCS01 The contents of the GB.LCN file have been al- Ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the autho- Displayed in Chart Portfolio when Navi-
tered. You may be in breach of the licensing arrangements rized license (Chart Permit). Your license has gation & Planning is started, when ARCS
that relate to the use of the chart. been falsified, so it is invalid. Information of User Maintenance Menu
License is invalid. Please contact your ARCS agent/dis- is checked, and when the chart is im-
tributor to correct this error. ported.
2 ARCS02 Chart Chart#. Chart Permit corrupted. Please Register Chart Permit again. Chart Permit is in Displayed in Chart Portfolio when the
reload original media. abnormal state. If the re-registration of Chart chart is imported
Permit does not restore the system to normal
operation, ask your ARCS agent/distributor for
the authorized license (Chart Permit).
3 ARCS03 Chart Chart#. Update information relates to a Import data from the latest chart CD and up- Displayed in Chart Portfolio when the
newer version of the chart. Please load the chart CD that date CD. The chart version of the update CD chart is imported
contain Chart# with an issue date of RCID. does not match the imported chart version.
4 ARCS04 Chart Chart#. The chart data already incorpo- Import data from the latest chart CD and up- Displayed in Chart Portfolio when the
rates this update information. Please load the latest update CD. The data on the current update CD is chart is imported
date CD. already imported.
5 ARCS05 Chart Chart#. License expired - updating is not Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Your Displayed in Chart Portfolio when the
permitted. Please contact your agent to re-new license. license has already expired, so updating is not chart is imported (only for Navigator
permitted. Service Edition)
6 ARCS08 Warning - License expired in less than one month. Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Your Displayed in the panel when the chart is
Please contact your ARCS agent for a license renewal. license (Chart Permit) will expire in less than a displayed (only for Navigator Service
month. Edition)
7 ARCS09 Chart Chart#. Warning - License expired. The Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. One Displayed in the panel when the chart is
displayed chart may not be up to date. Contact your Agent month has not passed yet since the expiry date displayed (only for Navigator Service
to arrange for a license renewal. of your license (Chart Permit). Edition)
8 ARCS10 Chart Chart#. License expired. ARCS charts can Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. One Displayed in the panel when the chart is
not be displayed. Contact your ARCS agent for a license month or more has passed since the expiry date displayed (only for Navigator Service
renewal. of your license (Chart Permit). The chart is not Edition)
displayed.
9 ARCS11 Chart Chart#. The loaded version of this chart is Import the latest license and chart CD. The chart Displayed in the panel when the chart is
too old to be used with the license. Please load a more encryption version number does not match the displayed (only for Navigator Service
recent version of the chart. Chart version is Enc#, Permit encryption version number of your license Edition)
version is Penc#. (Chart Permit). The chart is not displayed.
10 ARCS12 Chart Chart#. The license is too old to be used Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. The Displayed in the panel when the chart is
with this version of the chart. Please contact your agent to chart encryption version number does not match displayed (only for Navigator Service
obtain a new license. the encryption version number of your license Edition)
(Chart Permit). The chart is not displayed.
11 Larger Scale available More detailed charts than the currently displayed Displayed in the message area when the
chart can be displayed. Larger-scale charts than chart is displayed
the currently displayed chart exist.
12 Chart Shift Note that the currently displayed chart position Displayed in the message area when the
is shifted. The display position of the current chart is displayed
chart is shifted in accordance with user-defined
setting.
14 Reference 14-6
Time and/or place of error
No. Error message Procedure message display
13 Chart Shift To WGS84 Note that the currently displayed chart position Displayed in the message area when the
is shifted. The displayed chart is not of the chart is displayed
WGS-84 geodetic system, but it is displayed in
accordance with WGS-84 while the offset value
of chart data is used as reference.
14 WGS84 position cannot be related accurately to chart Note that the geodetic system of the currently Displayed in the message area when the
Chart#. displayed chart does not conform to WGS-84. chart is displayed
An offset value is not set to WGS-84, so the
chart cannot be shifted to WGS-84.
15 Loading different datum chart Note that the geodetic system of the currently Displayed in the message area when the
displayed chart is not WGS-84. A chart of a chart is displayed
non-WGS-84 geodetic system is displayed.
16 Loaded unknown datum chart Note that the currently displayed chart is of an Displayed in the message area when the
unknown geodetic system. A chart whose geo- chart is displayed
detic system is not set in chart data is displayed.
17 PIN Error Check for the Personal Identification Number Displayed in the panel when a PIN is
(PIN). The entered PIN is not correct. entered at start of Navigation & Planning
18 Data error(0xFFFFFF79):Chart Permit corrupted. Please Register Chart Permit again. Chart Permit is in Displayed in Chart Portfolio when the
reload original media. abnormal state. If the re-registration of Chart chart is imported
Permit does not restore the system to normal
operation, ask your ARCS agent/distributor for
the authorized license (Chart Permit).
Note 1 : # in the error message column denotes a name, ID or number.

Note 2 : Two types of ARCS are available, Skipper Service and Navigator Service. Update support is provided for
the latter but not for the former. ARCS06, 07, and 13-18 pertain to Skipper Service only.
14.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart

This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear while C-MAP Ed.3 chart is displayed on
ECDIS.
No. Error message Measures to take
1 C-MAP Ed.3 : No license installed. License has not yet been installed. Register the license in Chart Portfolio.
2 C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses expired. Please contact your The license is invalid. The chart is displayed only for 15 minute after it is started.
C-MAP agent for a license renewal. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license renewal.
3 C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses will expire at DD/MM/ The license will expire on DD/MM/YYYY. It will expire in less than 2 months. Con-
YYYY. Please contact your C-MAP agent for a license renewal. tact your C-MAP agent to request license renewal.
4 C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) not found. C-MAP security device (eToken) cannot be recognized. Press [POWER] to exit the
5 C-MAP Ed.3 : COM error

software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the equipment.
Com port error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the software and OS, and then,
14
press [POWER] again to start the equipment.
6 C-MAP Ed.3 : Unknown error An unknown error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the software and OS, and
then, press [POWER] again to start the equipment.
14-7 14 Reference
14.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart
This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear inside the log window of Chart Portfolio
while S-57/S-63 chart is imported/updated on ECDIS.
When Base CD is used:

No. Error message Cause Procedure
1 error(0x00000001) A chart defined in the catalog file on This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: File not found the chart CD is not found. import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
recurs, contact the chart distributor.
2 error(0x00000002) A catalog file on the chart CD con- This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: File Length tains a data length error. import or update processing.
3 error(0x00000003) The chart CD contains a file exten- This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: File extention sion error. import or update processing.
4 error(0x00000004) A chart file is found on the chart CD. This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: File count import or update processing.
5 error(0x00000005) Specified data is not found on the This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Data not found chart CD. import or update processing.
6 error(0x00000006) The chart CD contains a file data er- This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Data error ror. import or update processing.
7 error(0x00000007) A chart file on the chart CD contains This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: CRC a CRC value error. import or update processing.
8 error(0x00000008) The chart CD contains an exchange This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Exchange target data error. import or update processing.
9 error(0x00000009) The chart CD contains a file structure This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Data structure error. import or update processing.
10 error(0x0000000A) The attribute value of an object de- This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Attribute fined in a chart file on the chart CD is import or update processing.
incorrect. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
11 error(0x0000000B) Internal memory address error (in- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Instruction Ad- struction section)
dress
12 error(0x0000000C) Internal memory offset error (instruc- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Instruction offset tion section)
13 error(0x0000000D) Memory allocation error (PL rule sec- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: PL Rule Memory tion)
14 Reference 14-8
When Base CD is used: (continued)
14 error(0x0000000E) Data acquisition error (PL rule sec- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: PL Rule Infor- tion)
mation
15 error(0x0000000F) Chart-object attribute acquisition er- Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Attribute Infor- ror
mation
16 error(0x00000010) SENC file write error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Enc File write
17 error(0x00000011) Chart-object information acquisition Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Object Class get error
18 error(0x00000012) File path error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Directory create
19 error(0x00000013) A chart object on the chart CD con- This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Topology tains a topology error. import or update processing.
20 error(0x00000014) A chart area object on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Area Object contains a link error. import or update processing.
Link Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
21 error(0x00000015) A line object on the chart CD con- This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Line Object Link tains a link error. import or update processing.
22 error(0x00000016) A chart object on the chart CD is be- This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The chart CD cannot be used for
error: Object outside yond the boundary. import or update processing.
range Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
When Update CD is used:
1 error(0x00000001) Memory allocation error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Memory get
2 error(0x00000002) Chart index acquisition error An index needs to be created again. Index creation may take several hours.
error: Index get Contact your JRC sales representative.
3 error(0x00000003) SENC file is not found. An index needs to be created again. Index creation may take several hours.
14
error: File not found Contact your JRC sales representative.
4 error(0x00000004) A chart file on the chart CD contains This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: CRC a CRC value error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
5 error(0x00000005) The update CD contains an exchange This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Exchange target data error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
6 error(0x00000006) The update CD contains a file struc- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Data structure ture error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
14-9 14 Reference
When Update CD is used: (continued)
7 error(0x00000007) A chart defined in a catalog file on This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Data not found the update CD is not found. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
8 error(0x00000008) A SENC chart object name is not This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Object not found found. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
9 error(0x00000009) SENC chart-file size acquisition er- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Chart Cell size ror
10 error(0x0000000A) SENC chart file acquisition error Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Chart Cell data
11 error(0x0000000B) SENC warning-file size acquisition Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Warning Cell error
size
12 error(0x0000000C) SENC warning file acquisition error Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Warning Cell
data
13 error(0x0000000D) The update CD contains an update This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Sequential num- number sequence error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
ber error recurs, contact the chart distributor.
14 error(0x0000000E) An update chart on the update CD This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Object index contains an object index error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
15 error(0x0000000F) An update chart on the update CD This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Attribute infor- contains an attribute information er- Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
mation ror. recurs, contact the chart distributor.
16 error(0x00000010) An update chart on the update CD This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Attribute contains an attribute value error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
17 error(0x00000011) Internal memory address error (in- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Instruction Ad- struction section)
dress
18 error(0x00000012) Internal memory offset error (instruc- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Instruction Off- tion section)
set
19 error(0x00000013) Memory allocation error (PL rule sec- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: PL Rule tion)
Memory
20 error(0x00000014) Data acquisition error (PL rule sec- Contact selling agency of chart.
error: PL Rule Infor- tion)
mation
21 error(0x00000015) SENC file write error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Enc File write
22 error(0x00000016) Chart-object information acquisition Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Object Class get error
23 error(0x00000017) The update CD contains a data struc- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Data structure ture error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
14 Reference 14-10
When Update CD is used: (continued)
error: FFPC delete ture error (FFPC field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
error: FFPC edit ture error (FFPC field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
26 error(0x0000001A) The update CD contains a data struc- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: FSPC delete ture error (FSPC field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
27 error(0x0000001B) The update CD contains a data struc- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: FSPC edit ture error (FSPC field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
28 error(0x0000001C) The update CD contains a data struc- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: VRPC delete ture error (VRPC field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
29 error(0x0000001D) The update CD contains a data struc- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: VRPC edit ture error (VRPC field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
30 error(0x0000001E) The update CD contains a data struc- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: SGCC delete ture error (SGCC field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
31 error(0x0000001F) The update CD contains a data struc- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: SGCC edit ture error (SGCC field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
error: Coordinate Type ture error (coordinate type). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
33 error(0x00000021) File path error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Directory create
34 error(0x00000022) A chart object on the update CD con- This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Topology tains a topology error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
35 error(0x00000023) A chart area object on the update CD This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
Area Object Link contains a link error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
36 error(0x00000024) A chart line object on the update CD This error is not fatal.
error: Line Object Link contains a link error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
37 error(0x00000025) A chart object on the update CD is This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
14
error: Object outside beyond the boundary. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
range recurs, contact the chart distributor.
38 error(0x00000026) The update CD contains a chart point This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: point object error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
39 error(0x00000027) Chart CD Edition number error This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This chart cannot be updated.
error: Edition number Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing again. If the same error
14-11 14 Reference
14.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System
No. Abbreviation Description No. Abbreviation Description
1 WGS-72 World Geodetic System 1972 56 KAN Kandawala
2 WGS-84 World Geodetic System 1984 57 KEG Kerguelen Island 1949
3 EUR European 1950 58 KEA Kertau 1948
4 ADI Adindan 59 KUS Kusaie Astro 1951
5 AFG Afgooye 60 LCF L. C. 5 Astro 1961
6 AIN Ain el Abd 1970 61 LEH Leigon
7 ANO Anna 1 Astro 1965 62 LIB Liberia 1964
8 AIA Antigua Island Astro 1943 63 LUZ Luzon
9 ARF Arc 1950 64 MIK Mahe 1971
10 ARS Arc 1960 65 MAS Massawa
11 ASC Ascension Island 1958 66 MER Merchich
12 ATF Astro beacon E 1945 67 MID Midway Astro 1961
13 SHB Astro DOS 71/4 68 MIN Minna
14 TRN Astro Tern Island (FRIG) 1961 69 ASM Montserrat Island Astro 1958
15 ASQ Astronomical Station 1952 70 MPO M'Poraloko
16 AUA Australian Geodetic 1966 71 NAH Nahrwan
17 AUG Australian Geodetic 1984 72 NAP Naparima, BWI
18 PHA Ayabelle Lighthouse 73 NAS North American 1927
19 IBE Bellevue (IGN) 74 NAR North American 1983
20 BER Bermuda 1957 75 FLO Observatorio Meteorologico 1939
21 BID Bissau 76 OEG Old Egyptian 1907
22 BOO Bogota Observatory 77 OHA Old Hawaiian
23 BUR Bukit Rimpah 78 FAH Oman
24 CAZ Camp Area Astro 79 OGB Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
25 CAI Campo Inchauspe 1969 1936
26 CAO Canton Astro 1966 80 PLN Pico de las Nieves
27 CAP Cape 81 PIT Pitcairn Astro 1967
28 CAC Cape Canaveral 82 PTB Point 58
29 CGE Carthage 83 PTN Pointe Noire 1948
30 CHI Chatam Island Astro 1971 84 POS Porto Santo 1936
31 CHU Chua Astro 85 PRP Provisional South American 1956
32 COA Corrego Alegre 86 HIT Provisional South Chilean 1963
33 DAL Dabola (also known as Hito XVIII 1963)
34 BAT Djakarta (Batavia) 87 PUR Puerto Rico
35 GIZ DOS 1968 88 QAT Qatar national
36 EAS Easter Island 1967 89 QUO Qornoq
37 EUS European 1979 90 REU Reunion
38 FOT Fort Thomas 1955 91 MOD Rome 1940
39 GAA Gan 1970 92 SAE Santo (DOS) 1965
40 GEO Geodetic Datum 1949 93 SAO Sao Braz
41 GRA Graciosa Base SW 1948 94 SAP Sapper Hill 1943
42 GUA Guam 1963 95 SCK Schwarzeck
43 GSE Gunung Segara 96 SGM Selvagem Grande 1938
44 DOB GUX 1 Astro 97 SAN South American 1969
45 HEN Herat North 98 SOA South Asia
46 HJO Hjorsey 1955 99 TAN Tananarive Observatory 1925
47 HKD Hong Kong 1963 100 TIL Timbalai 1948
48 HTN Hu-Tzu-Shan 101 TOY Tokyo
49 IND Indian 102 TDC Tristan Astro 1968
50 INF Indian 1954 103 MVS Viti Levu 1916
51 INH Indian 1975 104 ENW Wake-Eniwetok 1960
52 TRL Ireland 1965 105 WAK Wake Island Astro 1952
53 ISG ISTS 061 Astro 1968 106 YAC Yacare
54 IST ISTS 073 Astro 1969 107 ZAN Zanderij
55 JOH Johnston Island 1961
14 Reference 14-12
14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS
can Import/Export
1. File Types
Route files
User chart files
Logbook files
2. File Names
Import source file name Default export target file name
Route files .csv, . rtn_ (binary file name) .csv

Normal
ANTS .csv, . rta_ (binary file name) .csv
2G .csv, .
User chart files .csv, .
Logbooks lgb_ (specified starting date_ending date) .csv
Specified period Example: lgb_020312_020313.csv
Selected log lgb_ (selected log date_UTC time) .csv
Example: lgb_020312_132445.csv
3. CSV File Data Structure

When importing files, character strings that come after // and until the end of the line are handled as
comments.
Commas (,) are used as delimiters.
Example:
// SYMBOL,InstName,,,,,,
// Comment,,,,,,,
// Lat,,,Lon,,
SYMBOL,BOYSHP01,,,,
User comment,,,,,
30,6.433,N,129,35.583,E
14
14-13 14 Reference
3.1 Route Files
3.1.1 Normal Routes
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import*1 Export*2
1*3 //(Space) Fixed character string

ROUTE SHEET exported by Fixed character string
JRC ECDIS.
2 //(Space) Fixed character string
<<NOTE>>This strings // indi- Variable length character
cate comment column/cells. You string
can edit freely.
Route name Route name of source file
, Fixed character
<Normal> Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Route comments Comments from the source
file
WP No. Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Prt [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Stb [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Arr Rad [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Speed [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Sail (RL/GC) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
*1 Information acquired when importing. (Same for all below)

*2 Information to be exported. (Same for all below)
*3 Lines with gray backgrounds indicate that those lines are comment lines. (Same for all below)
14 Reference 14-14
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import Export
Time Zone Fixed character string

, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Name Fixed character string
5 WP number 000
, Fixed character
Latitude degree value 35
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value 35.123
, Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value 139
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value 48.234
, Fixed character
Longitude code (E/W) E
, Fixed character
Port side route width 0.50
, Fixed character
Starboard side route width 0.50
, Fixed character
Arrival circle radius 0.50
, Fixed character
Planned speed 12.30
, Fixed character
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL
, Fixed character
Time zone 09:00
, Fixed character
Time zone code (E/W) E
, Fixed character
Name Yokohama
6 Repeat from line five for each
waypoint.
14
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code) are filled
with .
14-15 14 Reference
3.1.2 ANTS Routes

ROUTE SHEET exported by Fixed character string
JRC ECDIS.
can edit freely.
Route name Route name of source file
, Fixed character
<ANTS> Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Route comments Comments from the source
file
WP No. Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Prt [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Stb [nm] Fixed character
, Fixed character
Speed [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Sail (RL/GC) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
ROT [deg/min] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Turn Rad [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
14 Reference 14-16
Time Zone Fixed character string

, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Name Fixed character string
5 WP number 000
, Fixed character
Latitude degree value 35
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Planned speed 12.30
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Turning rate 10.00
, Fixed character
Turn circle radius 0.50
, Fixed character
Time zone 09:00
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
6
Name
Repeat from line five for each
Yokohama

14
waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code) are filled
with .
14-17 14 Reference
3.1.3 2G Routes
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import
1 ; Fixed character
(Space) x 63 characters Fixed character string
2 WP number 000
, Fixed character
Latitude degree value 3535.123
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value 13948.234
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Arrival circle radius 0.50
, Fixed character
Planned speed 12.30
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Turning rate 010.0
, Fixed character
Turning circle radius 0.50
, Fixed character
Time zone 09:00
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Name Yokohama
3 Repeat from line second for each
waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (numeric values and codes) are ignored.
14 Reference 14-18
3.2 User Chart Files
3.2.1 Header Records

USER CHART SHEET exported Fixed character string
by JRC ECDIS.
can edit freely.
User chart name File name of the source file
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
User chart comments Comments from the source
file
14
14-19 14 Reference
3.2.2 Object Records
a) Symbols
m //(Space) Fixed character string

SYMBOL Fixed character string
, Fixed character
InstName Fixed character string
+1 //(Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 SYMBOL Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Instruction name - 1 Instruction name
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+4 Comments Comments
+5 Latitude degree value 35
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Unused instruction name fields are filled with .
14 Reference 14-20
b) (Poly) Lines

LINE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
InstName Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Add END to the end of vertex. Fixed character string
+3 LINE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Instruction name Instruction name
+5 Latitude degree value of the apex 35
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the apex 35.123
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the apex (N/S) N
, Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the 139
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the 48.234
apex
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex E
(E/W)
+n Repeat for the number of apexes
plus five lines
END Fixed character string
14
(position end)
For lines without instructions, fill in the instruction name field with .
When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.
14-21 14 Reference
c) Arc

ARC Fixed character string
Base Point-Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Base Point-Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Radius[nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Start Angle[deg] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
End Angle[deg] Fixed character string
+3 ARC Fixed character string
+5 Latitude degree value of the ref- 35
erence position
, Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the ref- 35.123
erence position
, Fixed character
Latitude code of the reference N
position (N/S)
, Fixed character
reference position
, Fixed character
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the reference E
position (E/W)
, Fixed character
Radius 2.0
, Fixed character
14 Reference 14-22
Starting angle 120.0

, Fixed character
Ending angle 180.0
14
14-23 14 Reference
d) User Danger Lines

DANGER_LINE Fixed character string
+2 Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 DANGER_LINE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
apex
, Fixed character
apex
, Fixed character
(E/W)
plus two lines
(position end)
14 Reference 14-24
e) Polygons

POLYGON Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 POLYGON Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
apex
, Fixed character
apex
, Fixed character
(E/W)
plus two lines
(position end)
14
14-25 14 Reference
f) Circles

CIRCLE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 CIRCLE Fixed character string
erence position
, Fixed character
erence position
, Fixed character
position (N/S)
, Fixed character
reference position
, Fixed character
reference position
, Fixed character
position (E/W)
, Fixed character
Radius 2.0
14 Reference 14-26
g) Ellipses

ELLIPSE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Horizontal Radius [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Vertical Radius [nm] Fixed character string
+3 ELLIPSE Fixed character string
erence position
, Fixed character
erence position
, Fixed character
position (N/S)
, Fixed character
reference position
, Fixed character
reference position
, Fixed character
Longitude code of the reference
position (E/W)
E
14
, Fixed character
Horizontal radius 2.00
, Fixed character
Vertical radius 1.50
14-27 14 Reference
h) Fans

FAN Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Start Angle[deg] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
End Angle[deg] Fixed character string
+3 FAN Fixed character string
erence position
, Fixed character
erence position
, Fixed character
position (N/S)
, Fixed character
reference position
, Fixed character
reference position
, Fixed character
position (E/W)
, Fixed character
Radius 2.0
, Fixed character
Starting angle 120.0
, Fixed character
Ending angle 180.0
14 Reference 14-28
i) User Danger Areas

DANGER_AREA Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 DANGER_AREA Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
apex
, Fixed character
apex
, Fixed character
(E/W)
plus two lines
(position end)
14
14-29 14 Reference
j) Text

TEXT Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Rotation Fixed character string
+3 TEXT Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Text Fast current. Caution.
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
apex
, Fixed character
apex
, Fixed character
(E/W)
, Fixed character
Rotation angle 123
, Fixed character
Font size 14
14 Reference 14-30
3.3 Logbook File

LOGBOOK SHEET exported by Fixed character string
JRC ECDIS.
can edit freely.
3 No Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Date Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Time Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Event Fixed character string
, Fixed character
POS1 Fixed character string
, Fixed character
POS2 Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
COG() Fixed character string
, Fixed character
SOG(kt) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Heading()
,
Fixed character string
Fixed character

14
Log(kt) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Av.Speed 4h(kt) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Av.Speed 24h(kt) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
14-31 14 Reference
Voyage Dist.(G)(nm) Fixed character string

, Fixed character
Voyage Dist.(W)(nm) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Charts Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Set() Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Drift(kt), Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Wind Dir.(), Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Wind Speed(m/sec) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Wave Height(m) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Air Press(hPa) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Temp.(C) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Water Temp.(C) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Engine Rev.(r/min) Fixed character string
, Fixed character
4 Number 0001
,
Date (LMT) 2002/04/09
,
Time (LMT) 08:45:24
, Fixed character
Time zone 09:00
, Fixed character
,
Event type Specified time
,
POS1 name GPS1
,
POS2 name GPS2
,
14 Reference 14-32
Latitude degree value for POS1 35

,
Latitude minute value for POS1 35.123
,
Latitude code for POS1 (N/S) N
,
Longitude degree value for POS1 139
,
Longitude minute value for 48.234
POS1
,
Longitude code for POS1 (E/W) E
,
Course relative to land 123.4
,
Ship speed relative to land 12.3
,
Bow heading 123.5
,
Ship speed relative to water 12.4
,
Average ship speed for last four 12.0
hours
,
Average ship speed for last 24 13.2
hours
,
Total distance relative to land 12345.5
,
Total distance relative to water 12300.6
,
Chart name that caused the event JP34OBJ
,
Set 123.4
,
Drift
,
12.4

14
Wind direction 234.5
,
Wind speed 10.3
,
Wave height 2.0
,
14-33 14 Reference
Atmospheric pressure 1003

,
Air temperature 23.4
,
Water temperature 20.3
,
Engine revolutions 135.6
,
Comments Comments
n Repeat four lines for the number
of events.
14 Reference 14-34
Index
A Display alarm history ........................................... 3-28
Abbreviation for Geodetic System ..................... 14-12 Display area ............................................................ 2-5
Abort ....................................................................... 3-7 Display panel .................................................. 2-5, 2-7
Accepting S-57 updating chart ............................. 3-68 Displaying note and diagram (ARCS Only) ........ 3-60
Adjusting datum (ARCS Only) ............................ 3-62 Displaying playback panel ..................................... 9-8
Adjusting radar image ([RADAR]) ...................... 3-29 Displaying user chart ........................................... 3-67
After-sales service ................................................ 11-2 Disposal ................................................................ 12-2
AIS symbols ....................................................... 3-142 Drawing area (user chart) ..................................... 5-32
Alarm function ..................................................... 14-2 Drawing lines (user chart) .................................... 5-29
Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ........... 14-7
Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart ................ 14-8 E
Alarm list panel .................................................... 3-26 EBL/VRM 2-step operation ................................. 3-97
Alternate route editing mode ............................... 4-57 EBL/VRM using operation panel ........................ 3-88
ARCS chart display (ARCS Only) ...................... 3-55 Editing operations (C-MAP Ed.2) ....................... 8-92
ARCS PIN ............................................................ 3-19 Entering symbols (user chart) .............................. 5-25
ARPA symbols ................................................... 3-142 Entering text (user chart) ...................................... 5-36
ARPA/AIS list ...................................................... 3-32 Event mark (EVENT) .......................................... 3-69
ARPA/AIS target display ON/OFF ([AIS/ARPA]) ... 3-31
Auto sailing status panel ...................................... 2-11 F
Automatic sailing ................................................... 6-4 Features .................................................................. 1-3
Automatic sailing system ....................................... 6-2 File manager ........................................................... 7-3
Azimuth mode .................................................... 3-106 Filtering source chart ........................................... 8-93
Flowchart (Alternate route) .................................. 4-55
B Flowchart (For sailing) ......................................... 3-15
Bearing setting ....................................................... 7-9 Flowchart (General flow) ..................................... 3-14
Brightness (Adjustment) ...................................... 3-21 Flowchart (Graphic editor) ................................... 4-33
Flowchart (Table editor) ....................................... 4-12
C Flowchart (User chart file) ..................................... 5-9
Changing active panel .......................................... 3-58 Function of operation panel ................................... 2-2
Changing display color ([DAY/NIGHT]) ............ 3-24 Function of screen .................................................. 2-5
Changing object category (S-57/C-MAP Only) .. 3-45
Chart display area ................................................... 2-5 G
Chart editing menu ................................................. 5-4 Graphic editing menu ........................................... 4-28
Chart panel ............................................................. 2-8 Graphic editing mode ................................. 4-27, 4-35
Chart portfolio ........................................................ 8-2 Gray Scale ............................................................ 10-6
Chart symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only) .................... 3-121 Guard ring ............................................................ 3-85
Chart-Related Alarm Information ........................ 14-6
COG vector ........................................................... 3-84 H
Color pattern (S-57) ............................................. 10-5 HDG vector .......................................................... 3-84
Color test (ARCS Only) ....................................... 7-11 Heading line ......................................................... 3-84
Components ............................................................ 1-4 Highlighting ......................................................... 3-73
Connection ............................................................. 7-7
Construction ........................................................... 1-7 L
Coordinated universal time (UTC) .................... 3-145 Left-click ................................................................ 3-3
Creating alternate route ........................................ 4-55 Local mean time (LMT) ..................................... 3-145
Creating route using EBL/VRM keys and dials .. 4-52 Logbook .............................................................. 3-113
CSV format .......................................................... 4-25
Cursors .................................................................... 3-3 M
Maneuver curve .................................................. 3-102
D Manual update ...................................................... 5-18
Danger detection vector ....................................... 3-85 Marking information mark ................................... 3-71
Deleting system chart ........................................... 8-92 Marking tidal stream mark ................................... 3-72
Depth alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...................... 3-124 Menu operation ...................................................... 3-3
1/2 Index
Menu title bar ............................................... 2-5, 2-12 Ship's shape .......................................................... 3-83
Menu tree .......................... 2-12, 4-8, 4-28, 5-4, 9-3 Sound volume (Adjustment) ................................ 3-21
Merging user charts .............................................. 5-16 Specifications ....................................................... 13-2
Motion mode ...................................................... 3-106 Speed setting .......................................................... 7-9
Multi view screen ................................................. 3-78 Startup screen ....................................................... 3-19
My port list ......................................................... 3-111 Switching range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ................. 3-53
Switching scale (S-57/C-MAP Only) .................. 3-54
N System configuration ........................................... 1-13
Names and Functions ............................................. 2-3 System restoration in case of abnormal operations ... 3-37
Navigation & Planning screen ............................. 3-20
Navtex mark ....................................................... 3-117 T
Navtex message .................................................. 3-117 Table editing menu ................................................. 4-8
North arrow mark ................................................... 2-5 Table editing mode ....................................... 4-7, 4-14
Numerical input .................................................... 3-12 Temporary and preliminary notice (ARCS Only) ... 3-61
Time label display ................................................ 3-86
O Track display ........................................................ 3-86
Over-scale alarm ................................................... 3-52 Trackball ................................................................. 3-3
Troubleshooting .................................................. 10-11
P
Panel display of ARPA/AIS target ....................... 3-36 U
Playback ................................................................. 9-2 User chart edit mode .................................... 5-3, 5-11
Power OFF ........................................................... 3-21 Using analog meter .............................................. 3-81
Power ON ............................................................. 3-17 Using shortcut menu .............................................. 3-7
Primary position ..................................................... 7-8
Printing display .................................................. 3-149 W
Wide view screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............... 3-80
R
Reading out information on the objects ............... 3-75 Z
Release alarm ([ALARM ACK]) ......................... 3-25 Zooming area using rubber band
Right-click .............................................................. 3-3 (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...................................... 3-51
Route monitoring and system alarm ...................... 6-3 Zooming in/out ..................................................... 3-52
Route name and extention of file ........................... 4-2
Route options .......................................................... 4-4
Route planning ....................................................... 4-2
Route planning using graphic editor .................... 4-27
Route planning using table editor .......................... 4-7
Running fix ......................................................... 3-101
S
Secondary position ................................................. 7-8
Selecting all source charts .................................... 8-92
Selecting high resolution area (ARCS Only) ....... 3-55
Selecting high resolution chart (ARCS Only) ..... 3-59
Selecting low resolution chart (ARCS Only) ...... 3-59
Selecting menu ....................................................... 3-3
Selecting ROUTE ................................................. 3-39
Selecting S-57/C-MAP chart ............................... 3-66
Selecting startup menu ......................................... 3-18
Selecting To WP ................................................... 3-39
Setting alarm options ......................................... 3-135
Setting ARPA/AIS options ................................. 3-140
Setting chart options ........................................... 3-118
Setting date/time ................................................. 3-145
Setting logbook options ..................................... 3-116
Setting radar options .......................................... 3-139
Setting scales ...................................................... 3-134
Shifting chart ........................................................ 3-47
Shifting own ship position ................................. 3-146
Index 2/2
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR JAN-701/901M SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement

(EULA) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single
entity) and Japan Radio Co., Ltd. (JRC) for the JRC ECDIS equipment
that includes Microsoft software products.
You have acquired a device (DEVICE) that includes software licensed by JRC from
Microsoft Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (MS). Those installed software products of MS
origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and online or electronic documen-
tation (SOFTWARE) are protected by international intellectual property laws and
treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT JRC FOR INSTRUCTIONS
ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICA-
TION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. JRC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE,
AND MS HAS RELIED UPON JRC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETER-
MINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS
and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PER-
FORMANCE, ACCUARACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLI-
GENCE) IS WITH YOU . ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFER-
ENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGE-
MENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE
OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.
Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java.
Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or
resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance,
such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air
traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java
technology could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental
damage. Sun Microsystems, Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL
HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE
OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY
EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT
SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not
reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent
that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may perma-
nently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the
Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any
transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
EXPROT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You
agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFT-
WARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use
and country destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional
information on exporting the SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
Repair Request Form
<For creating contests>
Repair Request Form
Date : . . .
To:
Mr/Ms
Reading
TEL
Repair Point of
Requested by Contact
FAX
Address
Ship's Name Port Name
Product Name Product No.
Symptom: (in as much detail as possible)

Date of Malfunction: Malfunction Location:
(yyyy.mm.dd)
Desired Repair Repair On Site/ Desired
Method Repair at JRC Office Repair Date . . .
JAN-701/901M

ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Not use the asbestos +05647%6+10/#07#.

/CTKPG5GTXKEG&GRCTVOGPV
6GNGRJQPG
(CEUKOKNG
GOCKN VOUE"OLTEEQLR
#/56'4&#/$TCPEJ
6GNGRJQPG
(CEUKOKNG
GOCKN LTE"LTETPN
5'#66.'$TCPEJ
6GNGRJQPG
(CEUKOKNG
GOCKN UGTXKEG"LTECOGTKECEQO
%1&'0Q<20## +51+51%GTVKHKGF
/#4'FKVKQP,4%

Jan-701 901M

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Jan-701 901M

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

JAN-701/901M

Not use the asbestos +05647%6+10/#07#.

Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

Precautions for First-Aid Treatments

(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.

Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

q (1) Lift the back part of the patient's head.

e (3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.

Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

Fig.2 Cardiac massage

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in danger

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or

Examples of pictorial indication

The mark represents prohibition.

The mark represents instruction.

Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Do not use the offset function during navigation.

Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.

Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.

This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

Do not place any object on the operation panel.

Stand-alone type (JAN-701)

ANTS : Automatic Navigation & Track-keeping System

ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.

ARPA : Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.

Base CD : Chart CD containing a complete chart data.

C-MAP Ed.2 : C-MAP Edition 2. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

C-MAP Ed.3 : C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

C-MAP : Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.

CO. TO STEER : Course to steer. Heading command.

COG : Course Over Ground

Data Server : Organization providing S-63 chart.

Display : Screen displayed on the LCD.

EBL : Electronic Bearing Lines

ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System

ENC : Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

ETA : Estimated Time of Arrival

ETD : Estimated Time of Departure

HDG : Ships heading

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department

Leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints

LMT : Local Mean Time

Primary : Main positioning sensor.

Rubber band : Border that indicates the selected range.

S-57 : IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.

S-63 : IHO Data Protection Scheme

Scale : The display scale.

SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart

SOG : Speed Over Ground

Spot depth : Numeric representation of depth.

UKHO : United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

UTC : Coordinated Universal Time

VRM : Variable Range Markers

WOL : Wheel Over Line

WOP : Wheel Over Point

XTD : Cross Track Distance

XTL : Cross Track Limit

Automatic sailing functions

Name Model Quantity Comment

Processing unit NDC-1264 1 Included in the main unit

NCD-4224 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-701)

NCD-4308 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-901M)